DS1103 PPC Controller Board
Hardware Installation
and Configuration
Release 4.1 – March 2004
dS
How to Contact dSPACE
Mail:
dSPACE GmbH
Technologiepark 25
33100 Paderborn
Germany
Tel.:
Fax:
+49 5251 1638-0
+49 5251 66529
E-mail:
Technical Support:
info@dspace.de
support@dspace.de
+49 5251 1638-941
Web:
Subscription to e-mail newsletter:
http://www.dspace.de
http://www.dspace.de/goto?SupportNewsletter
How to Contact dSPACE Support
dSPACE recommends that you use dSPACE Support Wizard to contact dSPACE support.
It is available
•
•
•
On your dSPACE CD at \Diag\Tools\dSPACESupportWizard.exe
Via Start – Programs – dSPACE Tools (after installation of the dSPACE software)
At http://www.dspace.de/goto?supportwizard
You can always find the latest version of dSPACE Support Wizard here.
Software Updates and Patches
dSPACE strongly recommends that you download and install the most recent patches for
your current dSPACE installation. Visit http://www.dspace.de/goto?support for software
updates and patches.
Important Notice
This document contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright. All rights
are reserved. Neither the documentation nor software may be copied, photocopied,
reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in
whole or in part, without the prior written consent of dSPACE GmbH.
© Copyright 2004 by:
dSPACE GmbH
Technologiepark 25
33100 Paderborn
Germany
This publication and the contents hereof are subject to change without notice.
Brand names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies or organizations.
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Contents
Documentation Overview
9
Documentation Types ......................................................................10
About This Document .....................................................................12
Related Documents .........................................................................13
Introduction to the DS1103
15
Hardware ........................................................................................16
Software .........................................................................................18
Safety Precautions
19
Safety Precautions for Installing and Connecting the Hardware ...20
Safety Precautions for Using Expansion Boxes ............................. 22
Safety Precautions for Using AutoBox in a Vehicle .......................23
Safety Precautions for Using Connector Panels............................23
Before You Start
25
Installation and Configuration Overview ..........................................26
Checking the System Requirements.................................................28
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
3
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Contents ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Installing the Hardware
31
Resource Requirements of dSPACE Boards ...................................... 33
Setting up the DS1103.................................................................... 36
Changing Default I/O Base Addresses ......................................... 36
How to Change I/O Base Addresses ............................................ 38
How to Switch Off a dSPACE System............................................... 39
How to Install dSPACE Boards ......................................................... 40
How to Switch On a dSPACE System ............................................... 43
Installing Connector and LED Panels................................................ 44
How to Connect a Panel (CP, CLP) to a Board ............................. 45
How to Mount a Panel in a 19'' Rack ......................................... 46
Installing AutoBox in a Vehicle ........................................................ 47
Mounting a PX20 Expansion Box in a 19'' Rack............................... 50
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
51
Connecting via Ethernet.................................................................. 52
Connecting via Bus Interface........................................................... 53
Using Link Boards: Alternatives and Limitations .......................... 54
How to Establish the DS813/DS817 <–> DS814 Bus Interface ..... 56
How to Establish the DS815 <–> DS814 Bus Interface ................ 57
DS815 Connector and PC Card Link Cables ................................ 58
Identifying the Connection Status............................................... 61
Connecting dSPACE Boxes to the Host PC via DS830 ...................... 62
How to Install DS830.................................................................. 64
Identifying the Connection Status............................................... 66
4
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Contents
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC
and Expansion Box
67
Setting Up Under Windows NT 4.0..................................................69
How to Prepare and Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol
(Windows NT 4.0).......................................................................71
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection
(Windows NT 4.0).......................................................................75
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into a Network
(Windows NT 4.0).......................................................................78
Setting Up Under Windows 2000/Windows XP ...............................83
How to Prepare and Set Up the TCP/IP Configuration
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) ....................................................85
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) ....................................................89
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into a Network
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) ....................................................93
Creating a Multiconnect Group .......................................................98
Configuring the System
101
How to Run ControlDesk............................................................... 102
Configuring the DS1103 PPC Controller Board .............................. 103
How to Set the Connection Mode ............................................ 103
How to Register a DS1103........................................................ 106
How to View the Board Properties ................................................. 107
How to Verify the Configuration.................................................... 108
Updating the Firmware.................................................................. 109
How to Update the Firmware.................................................... 111
Implementing and Handling Applications
113
Implementing Models.................................................................... 115
Implementing Simulink Models Using Real-Time Interface ......... 116
How to Implement C Models .................................................... 121
Handling Real-Time Applications ................................................... 122
How to Handle Applications on the DS1103 ............................. 123
How to Use Scoutcmd to Load and Start Applications............... 125
Experimenting with ControlDesk ................................................... 126
How to Generate the Required Files.......................................... 127
How to Use ControlDesk .......................................................... 128
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
5
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Contents ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting External Devices to the dSPACE
System
137
How to Connect External Devices to a Board................................. 138
How to Connect External Devices to a Connector Panel ................ 140
Using the AutoBoot Option
143
Components of the AutoBoot Package ......................................... 145
Installation Requirements .............................................................. 146
How to Install the AutoBoot Hardware in the Expansion Box ......... 147
How to Format the CompactFlash Card ........................................ 149
How to Autoboot an Application .................................................. 150
Further Information on Using AutoBoot Option............................. 153
How to Connect the PC to the Expansion Box when the Autoboot
Application is Running.............................................................. 153
How to Load Slave Applications................................................ 153
How to Handle AutoBoot Applications with Long File Names ... 154
6
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Contents
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Uninstalling the System
155
How to Remove the Hardware ...................................................... 156
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
159
Board Overview............................................................................. 161
DS1103 Connectors ...................................................................... 163
Analog Connector (P1) ............................................................. 164
Digital Connector (P2)............................................................... 168
Incremental Encoder/Digital Connector (P3) .............................. 172
Slave DSP Debug Connector (P6) .............................................. 176
Slave DSP Flash Jumper (J1)....................................................... 177
CP1103/CLP1103 Connectors ....................................................... 178
BNC Connectors (CP1 ... CP28)................................................. 180
Slave ADC Connector (CP29) .................................................... 181
Digital I/O Connector (CP30)..................................................... 182
Slave I/O Connector (CP31)....................................................... 183
Incremental Encoder Interface Connectors (CP32 ... CP37,
CP39) ....................................................................................... 185
CAN Connector (CP38)............................................................. 186
Master PPC UART RS232 Connector (CP40) .............................. 187
Slave DSP UART RS232 Connector (CP41)................................. 188
Master PPC UART RS422 Connector (CP42) .............................. 189
Slave DSP UART RS422 Connector (CP43)................................. 190
CLP1103 LED Assignment ............................................................. 191
Status LEDs of the DS1103 ............................................................ 192
Mapping of I/O Signals
195
Conflicting I/O Features ................................................................. 206
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
7
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Contents ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Data Sheets
215
DS1103 Data Sheet....................................................................... 216
CP1103 Data Sheet....................................................................... 219
CLP1103 Data Sheet ..................................................................... 220
PX4 Data Sheet............................................................................. 221
PX10 Data Sheet........................................................................... 222
PX20 Data Sheet........................................................................... 223
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox ............................................................ 224
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox Data Sheet...................................... 224
AutoBox Dimension Drawings .................................................. 227
Tandem-AutoBox Dimension Drawings ..................................... 229
Power Input Connector ............................................................ 232
Lab Power Supply for AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox ...................... 233
DS830 Data Sheet......................................................................... 234
Troubleshooting
235
DS1103 Board .......................................................................... 237
Problems with Multiple Plug & Play Boards ............................... 238
Host PC (Bus Connection)......................................................... 240
Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) ....................................... 241
Expansion Box (Bus Connection)............................................... 245
Problems Related to the Firmware ............................................ 248
Problems with AutoBoot Option ............................................... 248
Index
8
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
251
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Documentation
Overview
dSPACE offers different types of documents: see Documentation Types
on page 10.
For a brief description of this document, see About This Document on
page 12.
For more information on the documents that are available when you
work with the DS1103 PPC Controller Board, see Related Documents
on page 13.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
9
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Documentation Overview ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Documentation Types
After you install your dSPACE system, you can access the entire
documentation as online help or printable Adobe PDF files. You will
also receive a printed version of some important documents.
dSPACE HelpDesk
The dSPACE HelpDesk is your primary source of information on both
the hardware and the software of your dSPACE system.
To open dSPACE HelpDesk
➤ Select dSPACE HelpDesk from the dSPACE Tools program group
of the Windows Start menu.
From each HelpDesk page, you can easily search and navigate to the
desired information. You also have direct access to printable
Adobe PDF files: see How to Work with dSPACE HelpDesk in the
dSPACE HelpDesk.
10
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
N
HelpDesk structure
Documentation Overview
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Only the documents of the products installed on your system are
available. The entire product documentation is available if you open
the HelpDesk on the dSPACE CD.
The structure of the documents in the HelpDesk reflects the different
phases of your work:
■ Installation and Configuration
■ Implementation
■ Experiment and Test
■ Production Code Generation
■ Calibration
The topics that are shown depend on your dSPACE system.
Context-sensitive help
When you work with any dSPACE software, you can get
context-sensitive help via the F1 key and/or Help button.
PDF Files
All documents are also available as printable Adobe PDF files in the
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Doc\Print folder: see How to Work with dSPACE
HelpDesk in the dSPACE HelpDesk.
Printed Documents
You will receive a printed version of the documents that are essential
for working away from your PC.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
11
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Documentation Overview ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
About This Document
This document will show you the installation and configuration of the
DS1103 PPC Controller Board.
It describes the hardware installation procedure, shows how to
configure the system, and explains how to get started with your
dSPACE system using an appropriate example.
Knowledge in handling the host PC and the Microsoft Windows
operating system is presupposed.
Legend
The following symbols are used in this document.
C
N
T
E
12
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Warnings provide indispensable information to avoid severe damage
to your system and/or your work.
Notes provide important information that should be kept in mind.
Tips show alternative and/or easier work methods.
Examples illustrate work methods and basic concepts, or provide
ready-to-use templates.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Documentation Overview
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Related Documents
The following provides a list of documents that you are recommended
to read when working with the DS1103:
Software Installation
and Management
■ dSPACE Software Installation and Management Guide provides
detailed instructions on installing and handling the dSPACE
software. It also shows you how to manage dSPACE licenses.
Features
■ DS1103 Features provides feature-oriented access to the
information you need to implement your control models on your
real-time hardware.
RTI and RTI-MP
■ RTI and RTI-MP Implementation Guide gives detailed information
and instructions on how to use Real-Time Interface (RTI and
RTI-MP) to implement your control models.
■ RTI and RTI-MP Implementation Reference offers reference
information on the various dialogs, files, options, etc. of Real-Time
Interface (RTI and RTI-MP) for dSPACE systems. It also describes the
blocks introduced by RTI-MP.
■ DS1103 RTI Reference provides concise information on the board’s
RTI library.
RTLib
■ DS1103 RTLib Reference provides detailed descriptions of the
C functions needed to program RTI-specific Simulink S-functions or
implement your control models manually via C programs
(handcoding).
ControlDesk Standard
■ ControlDesk Experiment Guide introduces you to the experiment
features provided by ControlDesk Standard.
■ ControlDesk Automation Guide shows you how to automate the
features provided by ControlDesk Standard.
■ ControlDesk Reference, ControlDesk Instrument Reference and
ControlDesk Automation Reference provide detailed information
on the menus, context menus, dialogs and Python libraries
contained in ControlDesk Standard.
AutomationDesk
■ AutomationDesk Automation Guide introduces you to the
automation features provided by AutomationDesk.
■ AutomationDesk Tutorial has several lessons that guide you
through using AutomationDesk.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
13
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Documentation Overview ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
■ AutomationDesk Reference provides detailed information on the
menus, context menus, and dialogs contained in AutomationDesk.
■ AutomationDesk Library Reference provides detailed information
on the libraries supported by AutomationDesk.
Interface libraries
■ MLIB/MTRACE MATLAB-dSPACE Interface Libraries contains
detailed reference information and instructions on the experiment
features of MLIB/MTRACE.
■ CLIB C Interface Library contains detailed reference information on
the C Interface Library CLIB, which contains C functions to access
the dSPACE processor and controller boards from the host PC.
3-D Visualization
■ MotionDesk 3-D Online Visualization Guide introduces you to the
real-time animation program MotionDesk for 3-D representation
of simulation results.
■ MotionDesk Reference provides detailed information on the
menus, context menus and dialogs contained in MotionDesk.
■ MotionDesk 3-D Object Library Reference provides detailed
information on the 3-D objects of the MotionDesk object library.
14
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Introduction to the
DS1103
The dSPACE system based on the DS1103 PPC Controller Board
comprises hardware and software.
■ For a short introduction to the hardware components of the
DS1103, refer to Hardware on page 16.
■ For information on the software, refer to Software on page 18.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
15
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Introduction to the DS1103 ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Hardware
The DS1103 PPC Controller Board is specifically designed for
development of high-speed multivariable digital controllers and
real-time simulations in various fields. It is a complete real-time control
system based on the PowerPC 604e processor. For advanced I/O
purposes, the board includes a slave-DSP subsystem based on the
Texas Instruments TMS320F240 DSP microcontroller.
The DS1103 PPC Controller Board is a standard PC/AT card that can be
plugged into a PC using the ISA bus as a backplane. The card can also
be inserted in a dSPACE expansion box communicating with the host
PC via an ISA-bus extension or Ethernet.
For purposes of rapid control prototyping (RCP), specific interface
connectors and connector panels (see below) provide easy access to all
input and output signals of the board.
To demonstrate control design and implementation, demo equipment
(VCFP Simulator) is available for the DS1103.
Easy access to input and
output signals
Using an adapter cable you can link your external signals from the
100-pin I/O connector on the board to Sub-D connectors. So you can
make a high-density connection between the board and the devices of
your application via Sub-D connectors.
Specific interface connector panels provide easy access to all the input
and output signals of the DS1103 PPC Controller Board.
■ The CP1103 Connector Panel provides easy-to-use connections
between the DS1103 PPC Controller Board and devices to be
connected to it. Devices can be individually connected,
disconnected or interchanged without soldering via BNC
connectors and Sub-D connectors. This simplifies system
construction, testing and troubleshooting.
■ In addition to the CP1103, the CLP1103 Connector/LED Combi
Panel provides an array of LEDs indicating the states of the digital
signals.
16
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Shipment
Introduction to the DS1103
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The DS1103 PPC Controller Board is a single-board system. The
package contains one board with a triple bracket and adapter cables
with six Sub-D connectors.
If you ordered the DS1103 together with an expansion box, the board
is preconfigured and already installed in the box.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
17
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Introduction to the DS1103 ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Software
The dSPACE software, such as the implementation and the experiment
software, comes on CD-ROM and has to be installed first. For
information on the software package, the installation and license
handling, refer to Introduction to dSPACE Software in the dSPACE
Software Installation and Management Guide.
18
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Safety Precautions
To avoid risk of injury and/or damage to the dSPACE hardware, read
and ensure that you comply with the following safety precautions.
■ Safety Precautions for Installing and Connecting the Hardware on
page 20
■ Safety Precautions for Using Expansion Boxes on page 22
■ Safety Precautions for Using AutoBox in a Vehicle on page 23
■ Safety Precautions for Using Connector Panels on page 23
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
19
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Safety Precautions ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Safety Precautions for Installing and
Connecting the Hardware
Installation sequence
■ Install the components of your system in exactly the order stated.
Any other sequence may lead to unpredictable results or even
damage the system.
■ Read the instructions carefully before starting installation.
■ Note all warnings given.
Handling boards
dSPACE boards contain sensitive electronic devices. Before unpacking,
installing and removing them, take the following precautions to avoid
damage caused by high electrostatic voltage:
■ Make sure that you and all material the board comes in contact
with are properly grounded.
■ During storage or handling, place the board on conductive foam or
in a protective bag.
■ Do not touch the board connectors.
Improper handling will damage the fan of the board.
■ Do not touch any components of the fan, neither during operation
nor when it has stopped.
■ Do not try to stop a rotating fan with your fingers or with the help
of tools.
■ Do not apply pressure to the fan bearing during installation and
removal of the board.
20
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing hardware
Safety Precautions
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Before doing any installation work, make sure that:
■ The power supplies of the host PC and the expansion box (if used)
are switched off.
■ No external devices are connected to the dSPACE system.
Connecting devices
To avoid risk of injury and prevent damage to the hardware:
■ Do not connect any high-voltage devices to the I/O connectors of
the hardware.
■ Do not apply voltages/currents outside the specified ranges to the
connector pins.
■ Do not connect or disconnect any devices while the dSPACE
System is powered up and/or external devices are switched on.
Make sure that the PC, the expansion box (if used) and external
devices are turned off beforehand.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
21
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Safety Precautions ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Safety Precautions for Using Expansion
Boxes
To avoid damage to the expansion box and to achieve safe and
trouble-free operation, the following guidelines have to be observed:
Installing
■ Before doing any installation work on an expansion box:
•
Make sure that the PC is turned off and no external devices are
connected to the box.
•
Unplug all external connectors from all boards already installed,
because these connectors might conduct dangerous high
voltage into the chassis or parts of the circuit.
Grounding
■ If there is any chance that external devices connected to the
boards might conduct dangerous high voltage into the chassis,
never unplug the power cord, which is the system’s protective
ground, unless all other connectors are unplugged.
■ The power cord must be plugged into a grounded wall outlet only.
Overheating, dust,
foreign objects
■ To prevent the system from overheating, do not block the air vents
or place the unit too close to a wall or other obstacle.
■ Do not expose the system to excessive dust or moisture.
■ Guard against foreign objects (staples, etc.) falling or blowing into
the unit, or liquids being spilled into it.
Turning expansion
boxes on and off
■ Before you work with an expansion box, you should always turn
on the expansion box before the host PC.
■ Do not switch off the expansion box while the host PC is still
running. This might lead to unpredictable errors.
22
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Safety Precautions
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Safety Precautions for Using AutoBox in
a Vehicle
To avoid damage to the AutoBox and to achieve safe and trouble-free
operation, the following special guidelines have to be observed:
■ Turn off the engine while connecting or disconnecting the car
battery. Even a brief disconnection of the battery while the engine
is running results in a load dump of the car generator producing
hazardous voltages of more than 100 V.
■ Double check the supply voltage polarity of the AutoBox. Reverse
polarity will immediately destroy the AutoBox power supply even if
the remote control input is turned off.
■ Do not block the air intake of the fan on the rear side, and provide
sufficient space for free air flow.
■ Do not operate the AutoBox for extended periods of time when
the cover is removed.
Safety Precautions for Using Connector
Panels
To avoid damage to the hardware and to achieve safe and trouble-free
operation, the following guidelines must always be observed:
■ Before connecting a panel to a board, make sure that the PC or the
expansion box (if used) are turned off and no external devices are
connected to the panel.
■ No chemicals other than alcohol (ethanol or isopropanol) should
be used to remove writing from the panel templates, since they
might damage the permanent print on the templates or even
corrode the panel.
■ Guard against foreign objects (staples, etc.) falling or blowing into
the unit, or liquids being spilled into it.
■ Do not expose the panel to excessive dust or moisture.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
23
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Safety Precautions ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
24
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Before You Start
Before you start:
■ Make yourself familiar with the installation and configuration
procedures of the DS1103 PPC Controller Board. Refer to
Installation and Configuration Overview on page 26.
■ Check if your system fulfills the system requirements. Refer to
Checking the System Requirements on page 28.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
25
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Before You Start ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Installation and Configuration
Overview
C
CAUTION! Changing the installation sequence may lead to
unpredictable results or even damage the system.
■ Install the components of your system in exactly the order stated.
■ Read the instructions carefully before starting installation.
■ Consider all warnings given.
Installation sequence
Installing the DS1103 requires the following steps in the specified
order.
1. Check whether the software has been installed on the host PC.
You must first install the software before installing any hardware
component in the host PC and before connecting an expansion
box to it. For detailed instructions on installing the software, refer
to Installing dSPACE Software in the dSPACE Software Installation
and Management Guide.
N
You need administrator rights to install dSPACE software.
2. Check whether your hardware meets the requirements for
DS1103. Refer to Checking the System Requirements on page 28.
3. Check if the default setting of the board must be changed. Refer
to Setting up the DS1103 on page 36.
4. Now you can install the hardware. Refer to How to Install dSPACE
Boards on page 40.
5. If the DS1103 is installed in an expansion box, connect the box to
your host PC. Refer to Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host
PC on page 51.
26
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Configuration sequence
Before You Start
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
After you install your DS1103, you can configure it in the following
steps:
1. Set the connection mode and register your hardware. Refer to
Configuring the System on page 101.
2. Check if your platform is ready to run real-time applications. Refer
to How to Verify the Configuration on page 108.
3. The firmware of the DS1103 can be updated if you install a new
dSPACE Release. Refer to Updating the Firmware on page 109.
4. After you install and configure your system, you are ready to
implement a model – either via a Simulink model including blocks
from dSPACE’s Real-Time Interface (RTI) or via a handcoded
algorithm – and download the corresponding application to your
real-time hardware. ControlDesk can be used to experiment with
your real-time application. Refer to Implementing and Handling
Applications on page 113.
N
If you encounter any problems during installation and configuration:
■ Check the description again.
■ Contact dSPACE support using the dSPACE Support Wizard. It is
available
Stand-alone operation
of expansion boxes
•
On your dSPACE CD at \Diag\Tools\dSPACESupportWizard.exe
•
Via Start – Programs – dSPACE Tools (after installation of the
dSPACE software)
AutoBoot option allows you to operate an expansion box as a
stand-alone system without being connected to your host PC, refer to
Using the AutoBoot Option on page 143.
External devices
For information on connecting external devices of your application to
the dSPACE system, refer to Connecting External Devices to the
dSPACE System on page 137.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
27
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Before You Start ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Checking the System
Requirements
Before installing dSPACE’s hardware, you have to check whether your
hardware meets the system requirements.
Host PC
Your host PC must fulfill the system requirements concerning:
■ The dSPACE software and other required third-party software,
■ The hardware equipment.
The hardware requirements depend on whether you want to install
the DS1103 in the host PC or in the expansion box. In the latter
case, your host PC must fulfill the requirements for the hardware
which is needed for connecting the host PC and the expansion
box.
For details, refer to Checking the System Requirements in the dSPACE
Software Installation and Management Guide.
Expansion box
If you want to install the DS1103 in an expansion box, the box must
fulfill the following requirements.
Required slots
You need one free full-size ISA slot and two free
adjacent brackets (refer to the illustration in How to Install dSPACE
Boards on page 40). In addition, one free full-size ISA slot is required
by the DS814 (bus connection) or the slot CPU (Ethernet connection).
Bus interface
If you want to connect the expansion box to the
host PC via a bus interface, the DS814 has to be installed in the box.
A suitable dSPACE link board has to be installed in the host PC.
Slot CPU
If you want to connect the expansion box to the host PC
via Ethernet, a slot CPU has to be installed in the box.
Keep in mind that the host PC requires a network adapter to establish
an Ethernet communication.
28
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Resources of
dSPACE boards
Before You Start
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The resources in the host PC and in the expansion box needed by your
dSPACE boards depend on your installation, refer to Resource
Requirements of dSPACE Boards on page 33.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
29
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Before You Start ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
30
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Installing the Hardware
dSPACE’s real-time boards can be installed in the host PC or in an
expansion box connected to the PC via Ethernet or a bus interface.
An expansion box is an enclosure to be used for dSPACE boards only. It
provides 20 (PX20), 10 (PX10) or 4 (PX4) full-size 16-bit PC/AT slots
with the standard 0.8 inch (20.3 mm) spacing.
Installation sequence
Install your dSPACE real-time hardware in the following order:
1. Depending on the installation, dSPACE boards require resources in
the host PC: see Resource Requirements of dSPACE Boards on
page 33.
2. Setup the DS1103: see Setting up the DS1103 on page 36.
3. You can install the DS1103 in your host PC or in an expansion box.
Refer to the following instructions:
•
How to Switch Off a dSPACE System on page 39
•
How to Install dSPACE Boards on page 40.
•
How to Switch On a dSPACE System on page 43
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
31
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connector panels
/LED panels
AutoBox
Connector panels provide easy-to-use connections between the board
and external devices. If you use connector panels, refer to Installing
Connector and LED Panels on page 44.
AutoBox is an expansion box for in-vehicle control experiments. After
the dSPACE boards are installed in an AutoBox, the AutoBox itself has
to be installed in a vehicle. For detailed instructions, refer to Installing
AutoBox in a Vehicle on page 47.
PX20 Expansion Box
The PX20 Expansion Box is available as either a desktop box or a
rack-mount version. However, you can also install the desktop box in a
standard 19’’ rack. For details, refer to Mounting a PX20 Expansion
Box in a 19'' Rack on page 50.
32
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Resource Requirements of
dSPACE Boards
Depending on the installation, dSPACE boards require resources in the
host PC and the expansion box.
Installation in the Host PC
The following table lists the required I/O address range together with
the default address and the required memory of dSPACE boards when
installed in the host PC. Some dSPACE boards support plug & play. In
this case, they require an interrupt request line (IRQ). Nevertheless, the
boards operate correctly, even if no free IRQ is available.
Board
Required I/O
Default I/O
Required
Address Range Base Address Memory Range
Required
IRQ
DS1003
8H
318H
None
DS1003/DS1004
(AlphaCombo)
10H
310H
DS1005
DS1102
DS1103
DS1104
DS2301 and DS2302
DS811
(No DS1003 in the connected
expansion box)
DS811
(One or more DS1003 in the
connected expansion box)
DS813
DS815
DS817
10H
10H
10H
–
10H
40H
300H
300H
Plug & Play
–
320H
300H
40H
300H
10H
10H
10H
Plug & Play
Plug & Play
Plug & Play
T
64 KB, range
starting at
0xD0000H
64 KB, range
starting at
0xD0000H
None
None
None
2 x 4 KB
None
None
64 KB, range
starting at
0xD0000H
None
None
None
None
None
None
1 (ISA)
1 (PCI)
None
None
None
1 (ISA)
1 (ISA)
1 (PCI)
The resource requirements listed in this table apply to the host PC.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
33
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Installation in an Expansion Box
Resources in the
expansion box
When installed in an expansion box, dSPACE boards require the
following resources of the expansion box:
Board
Required
Address Bytes
Default I/O
Base Address Required Memory
Required
IRQ
DS1003
8H
318H
None
DS1003/DS1004
(AlphaCombo)
DS1005
DS1006
DS1102
DS1103
DS2301 and
DS2302
10H
310H
10H
10H
10H
10H
10H
300H
300H
300H
300H
320H
N
Resources in
the host PC
64 KB, range starting at
0xD0000H
64 KB, range starting at
0xD0000H
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
The resource requirements listed in this table apply to the expansion
box, not to the host PC.
The resource requirements for the host PC depend on the connection
between the host PC and the expansion box:
Connection via DS811 Link Board
The Link Board requires the
following resources in the host PC:
34
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Required
Default I/O
Address Bytes Base Address Required Memory
IRQ
40H
300H
None
40H
300H
– None (No DS1003 in the
connected expansion box)
– 64 KB, range starting at
0xD0000H (One or more
DS1003 in the connected
expansion box)
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
None
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
Connection via DS813, DS815, or DS817 Link Board
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The Link
Boards require the following resources in the host PC:
Required
Default I/O
Address Bytes Base Address Required Memory
10H
Plug & Play
None
IRQ
1 (ISA for
DS813/DS815,
PCI for DS817)
Connection via Ethernet
The boards installed in the expansion
box require no resources in the host PC.
T
The slot CPUs installed in the expansion box as provided by dSPACE do
not conflict with the default I/O base addresses of dSPACE boards.
Connecting a MicroAutoBox to the Host PC
The MicroAutoBox can be connected to the host PC via the Link
Boards DS813, DS815, or DS817. The following resources are required
in the host PC:
Required
Default I/O
Address Bytes Base Address Required Memory
10H
Plug & Play
None
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
IRQ
1 (ISA for
DS813/DS815,
PCI for DS817)
March 2004
35
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Setting up the DS1103
Before you install your DS1103 in your host PC or expansion box, set it
up:
➤ Check if the I/O base addresses of your dSPACE boards must be
changed: see below for basic information. For instructions, see
How to Change I/O Base Addresses on page 38.
Changing Default I/O Base Addresses
You have to assign the default I/O base addresses (port addresses) of
dSPACE boards to avoid conflicts with other devices within your
system.
N
CAUTION! Assigning I/O addresses already used by other
devices may lead to system failure, data loss on the hard disk,
and even hardware damage.
■ Refer to your PC’s technical reference manual for a description of
the standard I/O map and to the documentation of additional I/O
boards that might be inserted in the PC.
■ Refer also to the lists of resources used in the diagnostic utilities of
the PC’s operating system. However, these are not always
complete.
Note the following hints on changing the default I/O base address of
dSPACE boards:
■ Regardless of the selected installation (host PC or expansion box),
the I/O address ranges of dSPACE boards in your system must not
overlap. If your expansion box is connected via Ethernet, this
applies also to the address ranges of the slot CPU, the FlashDisk
and AutoBoot option.
36
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
■ There are other devices like network boards or SCSI controllers
using the same I/O address range.
This does not apply if the expansion box is connected to the PC via
Ethernet or via the link boards DS813/DS815/DS817 and DS814. In
this case, only the link boards (PC) need resources in the PC. These
resources are assigned automatically by the link boards’
plug & play feature.
■ If you want to install the DS1103 in an expansion box, the
plug & play circuit on the DS1103 must be disabled. This is done
automatically, when the board’s I/O base address is set to an
address other than “000H”.
■ Suppose you have connected several expansion boxes to your
host PC via one of the link boards (PC) DS813, DS815, or DS817,
or via a MultiLink Panel DS830. If two (or more) of these boxes
contain a dSPACE board of the same type, you have to set them to
different I/O base addresses to allow the identification in
ControlDesk.
■ Within an Ethernet multiconnect group, the I/O base addresses of
all included dSPACE boards must be unique.
Instructions on
address changing
For detailed instructions on changing the I/O base address, refer to
How to Change I/O Base Addresses on page 38.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
37
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Change I/O Base Addresses
The I/O base address, meaning the port address, is selected via three
rotary switches on the DS1103.
Method
To configure the board manually
➤ Set the three rotary address switches located on the component
side of the board to the desired value.
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
0
0
0
C
4
C
8
I/O base addresses
usable for the DS1103
4
C
8
4
8
The following table shows the switch settings for some I/O base
addresses for the DS1103.
I/O Base Address (Port Address)
S1-1
S1-2
S1-3
000H (default)
Plug & Play enabled
0
0
0
240H1)
0
2
4
280H
0
2
8
300H
0
3
0
310H
0
3
1
380H
0
3
8
1) The I/O base address 240H is reserved for the slot CPU in the expansion box, if the
connection between host PC and expansion box is established via Ethernet.
38
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Switch Off a dSPACE
System
You must follow the instructions below.
Method
To switch off a dSPACE system
1
Turn off all external devices connected to the dSPACE system.
2
Shut down the host PC and turn it off.
N
Do not switch off a connected expansion box while the host PC is
still running. This might lead to unpredictable errors.
3
Result
Turn off the expansion box (if used).
The dSPACE system is ready for installing or removing hardware
components and connecting or disconnecting devices.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
39
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Install dSPACE Boards
The following instructions will guide you through the installation of
dSPACE boards in an expansion box/AutoBox or in the host PC.
You install the boards at your own risk. In the event of any damage
caused by improper handling, dSPACE cannot be held liable.
N
Preconditions
Working with more than one dSPACE board in plug & play
configuration may cause assignment problems. For details, refer to
Problems with Multiple Plug & Play Boards on page 238.
■ The system is switched off. For instructions, refer to How to Switch
Off a dSPACE System on page 39.
■ Precautions are taken to avoid damage by high electrostatic
voltages. For details, refer to Safety Precautions for Installing and
Connecting the Hardware on page 20
Method
C
To install dSPACE boards
WARNING! Hazardous voltages.
Risk of electric shock and/or damage to the hardware.
Before doing any installation work, make sure that:
■ The power supply of the host PC and the expansion box (if used)
are switched off.
■ No external device is connected to the dSPACE system.
1
Disconnect the host PC, the expansion box and all external devices
connected to them from power supply.
2
Open the enclosure.
3
Select an empty full-size 16-bit slot with two free brackets next to
it.
4
Remove the brackets that cover the openings on the rear side of
the enclosure.
40
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
C
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
CAUTION! Improper handling will damage the fan of the board.
■ Do not touch any components of the fan, neither during operation
nor when it has stopped.
■ Do not apply pressure to the fan bearing during installation and
removal of the board.
5
Insert the DS1103 and screw on the board’s triple connector.
The connector next to the board is labeled P1, the second
connector is labeled P2 and the third one P3.
Triple connector bracket: P3, P2, P1
6
DS1103
Close the enclosure.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
41
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
7
Reconnect the PC, the expansion box and all connected devices to
the power supply.
Result
Next steps
The installation is complete.
■ If your system is installed in an expansion box, it must be
connected to your host PC via Ethernet or a bus interface. For
further information, refer to Connecting an Expansion Box to the
Host PC on page 51.
■ You can turn on the dSPACE system. Refer to How to Switch On a
dSPACE System on page 43.
42
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Switch On a dSPACE
System
You must follow the instructions below.
Precondition
Method
The connecting/disconnecting of devices is completed.
To switch on the dSPACE system
1
N
To avoid unpredictable errors, you should always turn on the
expansion box before the host PC.
2
Result
Turn on the expansion box (if used).
Turn on the host PC.
The dSPACE system is running and you can work with it.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
43
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Installing Connector and LED
Panels
The CP and CLP connector panels provide easy-to-use connections
between the board and external devices. Devices can be individually
connected, disconnected or interchanged without soldering. This
simplifies system construction, testing and troubleshooting.
The CLPs additionally provide arrays of LEDs, which indicate the states
of the digital signals.
Connecting
CP/CLP to a board
After you have installed the board in the host PC or in an expansion
box, you can connect the accompanying panel to the board. For
detailed instructions, refer to How to Connect a Panel (CP, CLP) to a
Board on page 45.
Mounting panels
in a rack
As a standard, the CP and CLP connector panels are installed in a
desktop box made from aluminum profiles. They can optionally be
mounted in a 19’’ industry rack. For instructions, refer to How to
Mount a Panel in a 19'' Rack on page 46.
T
44
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
For the connector pinouts of CP1103/ CLP1103, refer to
CP1103/CLP1103 Connectors on page 178.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Connect a Panel (CP, CLP) to a
Board
For safe and trouble-free operation of the panels, various guidelines
must be observed. For details, refer to Safety Precautions for Using
Connector Panels on page 23.
Precondition
The system is switched off. For instructions, refer to How to Switch Off
a dSPACE System on page 39.
Method
C
To connect a panel to a board
CAUTION! Connecting external devices while the power supply
is switched on may damage the dSPACE hardware.
■ Do not connect or disconnect any device while the power supply is
switched on.
■ Turn off the host PC, the expansion box (if used), and the external
devices beforehand.
1
If the panel is to be mounted in a 19” rack, this should be done
first (see How to Mount a Panel in a 19'' Rack on page 46).
2
Plug the CP1103 or CLP1103 to the DS1103 and tighten the lock
screws. Take care not to mix up the connectors of the DS1103.
Connectors are installed correctly when ribbon cables are not
twisted and do not cross over each other. Furthermore, the
connectors are marked by labels P1A, P1B, etc.
3
Put templates on the panel. Turn the black clips on the panel
through 90 degrees to secure the templates to the panel.
4
Now you can connect devices to the panel. For detailed
instructions, refer to How to Connect External Devices to a
Connector Panel on page 140.
Next step
Now you can switch on the dSPACE system. Refer to How to Switch
On a dSPACE System on page 43.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
45
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Mount a Panel in a 19'' Rack
The connector and LED panels are installed in a desktop box made
from aluminum profiles as a standard. They can optionally be mounted
in a 19’’ industry rack.
Preconditions
■ The system is switched off. For instructions, refer to How to Switch
Off a dSPACE System on page 39.
■ All connections to external devices are removed.
Method
To mount panels in a standard 19’’ industry rack
1
Remove the aluminum box. To do so, unscrew one of its side
panels (4 screws). If there is a ribbon cable strain relief at the
bottom of the box, it must be cut open.
2
Bolt the panel to the front of a 19’’ rack as shown below.
Depending on the rack used, several M2.5x10 or M3x10 bolts are
required.
Panel is attached by
M2.5x10 or M3x10 bolts
122.5 mm
(4.82 inch)
128.5 mm
(5.06 inch)
M2.5 or M3 threads
5 mm (0.2 inch) spacing
46
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
Panel
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Installing AutoBox in a Vehicle
The AutoBox (Tandem-AutoBox) is the ideal environment for using
your dSPACE real-time hardware for in-vehicle control experiments. It
provides space for up to seven boards, on request even for up to 14
(one is reserved for a slot CPU), and can be mounted anywhere in a
vehicle.
The AutoBox features a DC–DC power supply with a remote control
input that should be used to turn the power supply on or off.
Mounting instructions
■ Do not mount AutoBox without rubber shoes at the shock
mounts.
■ Upside down mounting is not allowed.
■ For mounting you should add approx. 0.1 m (3.9 in.) space to the
outer dimensions of the AutoBox. This is to allow the AutoBox to
vibrate under extreme conditions without bumping against other
devices.
■ Do not block the air intake of the fan on the rear side, and provide
sufficient space for free air flow.
Safety precautions
The DC–DC converter built into the AutoBox lets you operate a
dSPACE system connected to a car battery. Due to the high currents
involved, special care must be taken when connecting the AutoBox
power supply to the car. Wires with high cross-section (6 mm2
minimum) are mandatory to avoid poor performance of the power
supply and excessive heating of the wires.
C
CAUTION! Reverse polarity destroys the
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox power supply even if the remote
control input is turned off.
■ Double check the supply voltage polarity of AutoBox.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
47
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
C
CAUTION! Even a brief disconnection of the battery while the
engine is running results in a load dump of the car generator
producing hazardous voltages of more than 100 V.
■ Turn off the engine while connecting or disconnecting the car
battery.
Wiring diagram
The wiring has to be performed according to the illustration below. If
you use TandemAutoBox both power supplies must be connected.
Remote to pin 4
–
(+) red wire to pin A2
+
60 A fuse
Car battery
(close to battery)
AutoBox
Car chassis
(-) unmarked wire to pin A1
N
■ The remote voltage should not exceed the supply voltage.
Overvoltage protection of the remote pin is 100 V.
■ The remote voltage may be used for starting AutoBox with a
remote switch: KL15, for example (output of the ignition/driving
switch).
■ If you connect the remote pin to the car battery directly, the
AutoBox will always be turned on, and the car battery will soon be
exhausted if the engine is not running. Thus, a switch is highly
recommended.
48
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Installing the Hardware
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
■ A preconfigured wire for the supply voltage is provided by dSPACE.
This wire is intended to operate the AutoBox with a laboratory
power supply during development. Therefore, pin 4 (remote) is
shorted to pin A2 inside the connector in order to save a separate
switch. Do not use this wire in the vehicle. Otherwise, the AutoBox
will always be turned on.
Power input connector
Each power supply unit provides a power input connector. It is a 7-pin,
male connector with two high-current pins. It is adapted from a 15-pin
Sub-D connector.
One mating connector with connecting leads is included in the
AutoBox package (Tandem-AutoBox = two connectors).
The following illustration shows the pinout (front view).
Connector
Pin
Signal
A2
Positive supply voltage
(8 V … 60 V DC)
A2
2
1
5
4
3
Pin
Signal
5
Reserved, do not use
2
Reserved, do not use
4
Remote control 1)
1
Reserved, do not use
3
Reserved, do not use
A1
Negative supply voltage (0 V)
A1
1) If you use the matching cable supplied by dSPACE the remote control line is connected to positive supply voltage within the
connector shell. This cable is intended for use with a laboratory power supply only.
Technical characteristics
For detailed information on the technical characteristics, refer to
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox on page 224.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
49
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Installing the Hardware ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Mounting a PX20 Expansion
Box in a 19'' Rack
The PX20 Expansion Box is available as either a desktop box or a
rack-mount version. However, you can also install the desktop box in a
19’’ rack.
When the outer decorative cover of a PX20 is removed, its chassis can
be mounted in a standard 19’’ rack. There are five M5 threads on
either side of the chassis. The bolts should be as short as possible to
prevent short circuits inside the unit, and must not protrude more than
5 mm (0.2") into the box. With common 19’’ racks, M5 x 6 bolts can
be used.
To prevent the system from overheating make sure that the ventilation
is not obstructed.
The plastic front cover can be snapped off and can be replaced by a
special version with rack handles, which is available upon request.
50
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting an
Expansion Box to the
Host PC
Expansion boxes expand the host PC for large dSPACE systems.
Safety precautions for
expansion boxes
Connecting an
expansion box
Prior to connecting or working with expansion boxes, ensure you have
familiarized yourself with the information provided in Safety
Precautions for Using Expansion Boxes on page 22.
If you install your system in an expansion box, the box must be
connected to your host PC via Ethernet or a bus interface. Depending
on the required link, refer to:
■ Connecting via Ethernet on page 52
■ Connecting via Bus Interface on page 53
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
51
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting via Ethernet
You can connect an expansion box to your host PC via Ethernet. In this
case, the expansion box is treated as a network client. Both the host
and client require a network adapter to establish communication. The
expansion box with Ethernet connection is delivered with a slot CPU
with a built-in 10baseT (twisted pair, 10 Mbit/s) network adapter.
N
If you want to install new dSPACE boards such as the DS1006 in an
expansion box connected via Ethernet, contact dSPACE to check the
slot CPU’s compatibility with the new boards.
After connecting the expansion box to the host PC via net cable, you
have to set up the Ethernet connection. Refer to Setting Up an
Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box on page 67.
52
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting via Bus Interface
You can connect an expansion box to your host PC via a bus interface.
In this case you have to install dSPACE’s link boards.
Working with
link boards
■ For details on the alternatives and limitations that apply to the link
boards, see Using Link Boards: Alternatives and Limitations on
page 54.
■ For information on how to establish bus connections, refer to:
•
How to Establish the DS813/DS817 <–> DS814 Bus Interface
on page 56.
•
How to Establish the DS815 <–> DS814 Bus Interface on
page 57.
■ For information on the matching link cable of the DS815, refer to:
DS815 Connector and PC Card Link Cables on page 58.
Status LEDs for
connection indication
■ The DS813, DS817, and DS814 link boards have LEDs on the
bracket to indicate the current status of the connection, refer to
Identifying the Connection Status on page 61.
■ The adapter cable for the new DS815 connector has LEDs on the
RJ45 connector to indicate the current status of the connection,
refer to DS815-RJ45 adapter cable on page 60.
Using DS830
MultiLink Panel
dSPACE’s DS830 MultiLink Panel allows you to connect up to
16 dSPACE boxes (expansion boxes or MicroAutoBoxes) to one
host PC. With the DS830, you need to install only one link board (PC)
in the host PC. For further information, refer to Connecting dSPACE
Boxes to the Host PC via DS830 on page 62.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
53
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Using Link Boards: Alternatives and
Limitations
Before using link boards you should familiarize yourself with the
alternatives and limitations that apply to dSPACE’s link boards:
■ Refer to Alternatives below.
■ Refer to Limitations on page 55.
Alternatives
If you use a bus interface to connect the host PC to an expansion box,
you currently have the three alternatives listed in the following table.
DS813 Link Board (PC)
Link Boards (PC)
Link Boards (Box)
DS813
DS814
DS815
DS814
DS817
DS814
The DS813 to be installed in the host PC is an ISA bus interface, and
requires a free 16-bit ISA slot in the host PC. The DS813 supports the
ISA Plug & Play mode: the PC’s BIOS or operating system automatically
assigns the I/O addresses actually used by the board.
DS814 Link Board (Box)
DS815 Link Board (PC)
The DS814 Link Board (Box) must be installed in the expansion box. It
requires a free 16-bit ISA slot in the expansion box.
The DS815 to be installed in the host PC is a PC card, and requires a
free PC card slot in the host PC. The DS815 always works in
plug & play mode: the operating system automatically assigns the
I/O addresses actually used by the board.
N
54
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
If you work with Windows NT, use the PC card support supplied with
Windows NT instead of third-party PC card software.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS817 Link Board (PC)
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The DS817 to be installed in the host PC is a PCI interface, and
requires a free PCI slot in the host PC. The DS817 always works in
plug & play mode: the PC’s BIOS or operating system automatically
assigns the I/O addresses actually used by the board.
Limitations
The following limitations currently apply for the link boards DS813,
DS814, DS815, and DS817:
Number of
link boards (PC)
■ You can install only up to eight DS813 or DS817 boards in one
host PC.
■ Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP allow only
one DS815. If you want to work with more than one expansion
box, use the DS813, DS817, or DS830.
■ If you want to work with several boxes, you can use the DS830
MultiLink Panel as an alternative. With the DS830, you need to
install only one link board (PC) in the host PC. For further
information, refer to Connecting dSPACE Boxes to the Host PC via
DS830 on page 62.
Other PC cards
■ If you want to use the DS815 together with other PC cards under
Windows NT, resource conflicts may occur. For further information,
see Using the DS815 with Other PC Cards Under Windows NT on
page 246.
Third-party socket
services
■ If you want to use the DS815 together with third-party socket
services such as CardWare, problems may occur when you install
the DS815. For further information, see Expansion Box (Bus
Connection) on page 245.
Other limitations
■ The default setting of the rotary switches of the DS813 must be
“000”(plug & play).
■ The length of the cable between a link board (PC) and a link board
(Box) is limited to 10 m (patch cable) and 100 m (fiber-optic cable).
■ You cannot connect the dSPACE boards that are currently being
offered to the host PC via DS811 and DS812 Link Board.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
55
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Establish the
DS813/DS817 <–> DS814 Bus Interface
The following instructions apply if you want to install a bus connection
with the link boards DS813/DS817 and DS814.
Cables
Preconditions
Use only the cables (crossed-over patch cable or fiber-optic cable)
which come with the hardware package.
■ The system is switched off. For instructions, refer to How to Switch
Off a dSPACE System on page 71.
■ A link board (DS813 or DS817) is installed in your host PC.
■ The DS814 is installed in your expansion box.
Possible methods
There are two ways you can establish a bus connection:
■ Via crossed-over patch cable. Refer to Method 1.
■ Via fiber-optic cable. Refer to Method 2.
Method 1
To establish the bus interface via crossed-over patch cable
1
N
Connect the DS813 or the DS817 to the DS814.
Do not connect the crossed-over patch cable to an Ethernet LAN or
the LAN connectors of a PC or a notebook.
2
Switch on the system. Refer to How to Switch On a dSPACE System
on page 76.
Method 2
C
To establish the bus interface via fiber-optic cable
CAUTION! Bending may damage the fiber-optic cable.
■ Do not bend the fiber-optic cable beyond a radius of less than
40 mm.
1
Remove the protective caps from the connectors of the DS813 or
DS817 and DS814.
56
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
2
Remove the small protective caps from the plugs.
3
Connect the DS813 or the DS817 to the DS814.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
4
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Switch on the system. Refer to How to Switch On a dSPACE System
on page 76.
How to Establish the
DS815 <–> DS814 Bus Interface
The following instructions apply if you want to install a bus connection
with link boards DS815 and DS814.
Cables
Use only the cables which come with the hardware package.
■ DS815 Link Boards (PC) delivered before November 2001 are
equipped with other connectors. You need a matching link cable.
For details, refer to DS815 Connector and PC Card Link Cables on
page 58.
■ To connect the DS815 with a standard patch cable an adapter
cable is available from dSPACE. For details, refer to DS815-RJ45
adapter cable on page 60.
Preconditions
■ The system is switched off. For instructions, refer to How to Switch
Off a dSPACE System on page 71.
■ A DS815 is inserted in your host PC.
■ A DS814 is installed in your expansion box.
Method
To establish the DS815 ↔ DS814 bus interface
1
Attach the connector of the DS815 to the DS814 Link Board (Box)
with the crossed-over patch cable.
N
Do not connect the crossed-over patch cable to an Ethernet LAN or
the LAN connectors of a PC or a notebook.
2
Switch on the system. Refer to How to Switch On a dSPACE System
on page 76.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
57
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
T
Using Windows NT 4.0: Normally, the DS815 will be recognized and
configured automatically if PC card support is activated. If your PC
does not recognize a PC card, you have to activate the PC card
support of your PC's operating system.
DS815 Connector and PC Card Link
Cables
DS815 Link Boards (PC) delivered as of November 2001 are equipped
with a new connector and come with a new matching link cable.
58
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The PC card link cables of DS815 boards delivered before
November 2001 are not compatible with the new cables.
Old PC card link cable ...
... without strain-relief clamp
New PC card link cable
... with strain-relief clamp
Old DS815 connector
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
New DS815 connector
March 2004
59
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
T
DS815-RJ45
adapter cable
DS815 boards delivered before November 2001 have a blue label.
Boards delivered later have a red label, or a blue label with “Vs. 2.0“.
An adapter cable is available for the new DS815 connector to adapt
the DS815 to a standard patch cable with an RJ45 connector. The
adapter cable is labeled “DS815-RJ45 Vs 2.0”.
LED (yellow)
LED (green)
Two LEDs indicate the current status of the connection.
Yellow LED
A lit yellow LED indicates that the connection between
the host PC and the expansion box is ready for communication.
Green LED
received.
N
60
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
A lit green LED indicates that data is being sent or
For the connection between the DS815-RJ45 adapter cable and the
DS814 Link Board (Box), you must use a crossed-over patch cable.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Identifying the Connection Status
DS813, DS814, DS817
Three LEDs on the brackets of the DS813, DS817 and DS814 indicate
the current status of the connection.
yellow
patch cable
connector
green
red
fiberoptic
connector
Yellow LED
A lit yellow LED indicates that the connection between
the host PC and the expansion box is ready for communication.
Red LED
A lit red LED indicates that the active connection between
the host PC and the expansion box uses a fiber-optic cable.
Green LED
A lit green LED indicates that data is being sent or
received.
DS815
The DS815 is not equipped with optical status indicators. Using the
DS815-RJ45 adapter cable, you can identify the current status of the
connection by the two LEDs integrated in the shell of the RJ45
connector. For details, refer to DS815-RJ45 adapter cable on page 60.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
61
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting dSPACE Boxes to
the Host PC via DS830
You can connect several dSPACE boxes – expansion boxes and/or
MicroAutoBoxes – to one host PC. Each connection requires a
separate link board (PC) installed in the PC. The number of
dSPACE boxes you can connect to the PC is limited by the number of
free slots for link boards.
As an example, the following illustration shows how you can connect
four boxes to your PC. You require four link boards (PC) in the PC.
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
Box 4
Host PC
DS830 MultiLink Panel
dSPACE’s DS830 MultiLink Panel allows you to connect up to
16 dSPACE boxes to one host PC. With the DS830, you need to install
only one link board (PC) in the host PC.
As an example, the following illustration shows how to connect the
DS830 to the host PC and four dSPACE boxes.
Box 1
Box 2
Box 3
DS830
Box 4
Host PC
62
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
T
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
■ You can connect any combination of expansion boxes and
MicroAutoBoxes to the DS830.
■ You can connect several DS830 panels to one host PC. Each DS830
has to be connected to the PC via a separate link board (PC).
■ To install your dSPACE system in a vehicle, you can use the car
battery as the power supply for the DS830.
Connecting and
installing the DS830
To connect the DS830 to the host PC as well as to the dSPACE boxes,
you can use any combination of crossed-over patch cables and
fiber-optic cables. For example, you can connect the DS830 to the
host PC and an expansion box via a fiber-optic cable, and to a
MicroAutoBox via a patch cable.
The DS830 can be used in a laboratory or in vehicle. The cables
required to supply power to the DS830 via a mains socket or a car
battery are part of the DS830 hardware package. The cable for the
mains socket includes a power supply unit (15.0 V, 4.0 A).
For instructions on the installation, see How to Install DS830 on
page 64.
Limitations
The following limitations currently apply to the DS830:
■ Up to 4 (DS830/4), 8 (DS830/8) or 16 (DS830/16) dSPACE boxes
can be connected to one panel.
■ The length of each connection is limited to
•
10 m (crossed-over patch cable), and
•
100 m (fiber-optic cable).
Therefore, the maximum distance between a host PC and a box is
200 m (DS830 connected to both the PC and the box via
fiber-optic cables).
■ DS830 panels cannot be cascaded, which means that you cannot
connect one DS830 to another. Each DS830 must be connected
directly to a link board (PC).
Data sheet
For the specifications of the DS830, refer to DS830 Data Sheet on
page 234.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
63
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Status LEDs
The DS830 is equipped with status LEDs: see Identifying the
Connection Status on page 66.
How to Install DS830
The front of the DS830 panel provides all the connectors required for
installation. The following illustration shows the front of the DS830/8.
Fiber-optic
connectors
Patch cable
connectors
Connection
to host PC
Connection
to dSPACE boxes
Connection
to power supply
To install the DS830, you have to connect it to the host PC and the
dSPACE boxes, and supply power to the panel.
To connect the DS830
1
Connect the DS830 to the host PC.
2
Connect the DS830 to the dSPACE boxes (expansion box and/or
MicroAutoBoxes).
N
Use only the cable (fiber-optic or patch cable) supplied with the
dSPACE hardware package.
The DS830 hardware package also includes the cables for connecting
the DS830 to the power supply.
64
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
To supply power to the DS830 via mains socket
➤ To install your system in a laboratory, use the cable with the
integrated power supply unit. Plug the power supply cable into the
LEMO connector of the DS830.
To supply power to the DS830 via car battery
➤ To install your system in a vehicle, use the cable with the
unterminated end and connect this end to the car battery. Use a
5 A fuse to protect the DS830.
The illustration below shows how to supply power to the DS830 if
installed in a vehicle.
DS830/x
+
Red wire
5 A fuse
(close to battery)
–
Car battery
(12 V)
Black wire
N
It is highly recommended to insert a fuse into the main power
supply wire. The fuse should be installed close to the battery.
If you connect the red wire to the car battery directly, the DS830 will
always be turned on, and the car battery will soon run down if the
engine does not operate. Thus, a switch is highly recommended.
N
Use only a switch and wires that are designed for at least 5 A.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
65
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting an Expansion Box to the Host PC ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Identifying the Connection Status
The front of the DS830 panel has several LEDs, which indicate the
current status of the connection to the host PC and the connected
dSPACE boxes (expansion boxes or MicroAutoBoxes), as well as the
status of the panel’s power supply.
The illustration below shows the status LEDs for one pair of fiber-optic
and patch cable connectors.
PC
Box1
Fiber-optic
connector
Yellow LED
(fiber-optic
connector)
Red LED
LEMO
connector
Green LED
Yellow LED
(patch cable
connector)
Green power LEDs
Patch cable
connector
Yellow LED (fiber-optic connector)
Lit if the host PC and the
corresponding dSPACE box are currently used for communication.
Red LED
Green LED
Lit if a fiber-optic cable is used.
Lit when data is being sent or received.
Yellow LED (patch cable connector)
Lit if the connection to the
host PC or a connected dSPACE box is ready for communication.
Green power LEDs
Lit both when power is supplied correctly to
the DS830.
66
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Setting Up an Ethernet
Connection Between PC
and Expansion Box
You can connect an expansion box (AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox) to
your host PC via Ethernet. In this case, the expansion box is treated as
a network client.
N
Establishing a connection between an expansion box and the host PC
via Ethernet is recommended for advanced users only.
The steps required to set up an Ethernet connection depend on your
operating system. See:
■ Setting Up Under Windows NT 4.0 on page 69
■ Setting Up Under Windows 2000/Windows XP on page 83
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
67
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
You can create a multiconnect group that allows you to experiment
with several expansion boxes connected to the host PC via Ethernet
(= several network clients) at the same time. For details, refer to
Creating a Multiconnect Group on page 98.
68
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Setting Up Under
Windows NT 4.0
The connection between the PC (host) and an expansion box (client) is
based on the TCP/IP protocol provided by Windows NT 4.0. There are
two ways to connect a client to the host:
■ Peer-to-peer connection
The expansion box and the host PC are directly connected in a
peer-to-peer configuration, and neither the host nor the client is
connected to any other network.
■ Integration in an existing network
The expansion box becomes part of an existing network using
TCP/IP, for example, a local area network. In this case, the TCP/IP
protocol is already installed on the host PC.
Setting up procedure
To connect an expansion box via Ethernet under Windows NT 4.0,
follow the instructions given in the flow chart below. The boxes in the
flow chart refer to the corresponding sections in the text.
■ Begin with the instructions in How to Prepare and Set Up the
TCP/IP Protocol (Windows NT 4.0) on page 71.
■ To connect the expansion box directly to the host PC see How to
Prepare and Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol (Windows NT 4.0) on
page 71.
■ If you want to connect the expansion box to an existing network,
follow the instructions given in How to Integrate the Expansion
Box into a Network (Windows NT 4.0) on page 78.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
69
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting an Expansion
Box via Ethernet Under
Windows NT 4.0
How to Prepare and Set Up
the TCP/IP Protocol see page 71
Is a
Network Adapter
Installed on
the PC?
No
Installing a Network
Adapter on the PC
see page 71
Yes
Is the
TCP/IP Protocol
Installed on
the PC?
No
How to Install the TCP/IP
Protocol on the PC
Yes
see page 72
How to Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol
see page 74
Integrate
the Expansion
Box into an Existing
Network?
No
Yes
How to Integrate the Expansion
Box into a Network see page 78
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer
Connection
How to Set Up a
Peer-to-Peer Connection
see page 75
see page 75
How to Change the IP Address
of the Expansion Box
see page 79
How to Restore the TCP/IP
Configuration of the PC
see page 80
How to Connect the Expansion
Box to the Network and
Test the Connection
see page 81
Expansion Box
Ready for Use
70
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Prepare and Set Up the TCP/IP
Protocol
(Windows NT 4.0)
Depending on the installation in your host PC, refer to the following
instructions:
■ If there is no network adapter installed on your host PC, refer
to Installing a Network Adapter on the PC (Windows NT 4.0) on
page 71.
■ If there is no TCP/IP protocol installed on your host PC, refer to
How to Install the TCP/IP Protocol on the PC (Windows NT 4.0) on
page 72.
■ If the TCP/IP protocol is already installed on your host PC, refer
to How to Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol (Windows NT 4.0) on
page 74.
N
Changing the TCP/IP configuration under Windows NT 4.0 requires
administrator rights.
Installing a Network Adapter on the PC
(Windows NT 4.0)
For an Ethernet connection the host PC and the expansion box require
a network adapter to establish communication. The expansion box
with Ethernet connection is delivered with a slot CPU with a built-in
10baseT (twisted pair, 10 Mbit/s) network adapter.
If there is no network adapter installed in your host PC, one of the
following adapter types has to be installed:
■ In a desktop PC: an ISA- or PCI-based network adapter
■ In a notebook PC: a PC card network adapter
Install and test the network adapter according to the manufacturer’s
documentation. The Windows NT online help provides useful
information and advice.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
71
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Install the TCP/IP Protocol on the PC
(Windows NT 4.0)
You can install the TCP/IP protocol only if a network adapter is installed
on your host PC.
To install and configure the TCP/IP protocol on the host PC
1
Insert the Windows NT 4.0 CD.
2
From the Start menu, choose Settings - Control Panel.
3
Double-click Network in the Control Panel.
The Network dialog opens.
4
Select the Protocols page. If TCP/IP is already installed, proceed
with step 9. Otherwise, click Add.
5
Select TCP/IP Protocol, and click OK.
6
The Setup dialog opens. You are asked if you want a DHCP Server
to dynamically provide an IP address. Click No to choose the
IP address yourself.
Windows NT copies files.
7
In the Network dialog, click Close.
The TCP/IP protocol will now be installed.
8
The Microsoft TCP/IP Properties dialog opens. Select the IP
Address page. Proceed with step 11.
9
Click TCP/IP Protocol, and select Properties.
10 Select the IP Address page.
11 Select Specify an IP Address. Enter the value 192.100.100.1 in
the IP Address edit field.
12 In the Subnet Mask edit field, enter the value 255.255.255.0.
13 Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog.
14 Click OK to close the Network dialog.
15 When prompted, confirm to restart the host PC.
72
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
16 Check the correct installation of the TCP/IP protocol on the
host PC:
In a DOS window, enter the command: ping 127.0.0.1
If the TCP/IP protocol is installed properly, the following message
will appear (the values vary for different computers and networks):
Pinging 127.0.0.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
17 Proceed with
T
•
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection (Windows NT 4.0)
on page 75 or
•
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into a Network
(Windows NT 4.0) on page 78.
If any problem comes up when you install the TCP/IP protocol, see
Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
73
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol
(Windows NT 4.0)
If the TCP/IP protocol is already installed on your host PC, you have to
set up the TCP/IP protocol. During this procedure, write down the
previous TCP/IP configuration for later restoration.
To set up the TCP/IP protocol on the host PC
1
From the Start menu, choose Settings - Control Panel.
2
Double-click Network in the Control Panel.
The Network dialog opens.
3
Select the Protocols page.
4
Click TCP/IP Protocol, and select Properties.
5
Select the IP Address page.
6
Write down all configured values and options to restore them later.
7
Select Specify an IP Address. Enter the value 192.100.100.1 in
the IP Address edit field.
8
In the Subnet Mask edit field, enter the value 255.255.255.0.
9
Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog.
10 Click OK to close the Network dialog.
11 When prompted, confirm to restart the host PC.
12 Proceed with
T
74
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
•
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection (Windows NT 4.0)
on page 75 or
•
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into a Network
(Windows NT 4.0) on page 78.
If any problem comes up when you set up the TCP/IP protocol, see
Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection
(Windows NT 4.0)
After preparing and setting up the TCP/IP protocol, you can set up the
peer-to-peer connection.
A peer-to-peer connection between the host and client means that
neither the host nor the client is connected to any other network.
You must carry out this step, even if you want to integrate the
expansion box into an existing network. In that case the IP address of
the expansion box must comply with the conventions of the network.
So its default IP address (192.100.100.98) must be changed after
setting up a peer-to-peer connection between the host PC and the
expansion box.
To set up and test a peer-to-peer connection
1
If the host PC is already part of an existing network, switch it off,
and disconnect it from the network.
2
N
Connect the expansion box to the host PC, using the supplied
crossed-over patch cable.
For a peer-to-peer connection, the crossed-over patch cable
supplied with the expansion box must be used. If connecting to an
existing network, for example, via a hub, a standard patch cable
must probably be used. If you are uncertain, ask your network
administrator.
3
Turn on the expansion box.
During booting, the expansion box beeps several times. The last
beep sequence indicates whether the default IP address is active
(three short beeps) or if the IP address has been changed by the
user (one long beep). In the following it is assumed that the
default IP address (192.100.100.98) is active.
4
Turn on the host PC.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
75
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
N
The host PC will take longer to boot and will display error
messages because of the missing connection to the network.
Ignore these error messages for now.
The connection between the host PC and the expansion box can
now be tested.
5
In a DOS window, enter the command: ping 192.100.100.98,
which is the default IP address of the expansion box.
If the following message appears, the peer-to-peer connection is
ready for use (the values vary on different computers and
networks):
Pinging 192.100.100.98 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
■ If the expansion box is used only in a peer-to-peer connection,
the network setup is now complete.
•
If needed, refer to How to Change the Host Table
(Windows NT 4.0) on page 77 to assign an alias name to the
expansion box IP address.
•
Continue with Configuring the System on page 101.
■ If the expansion box is to be used in an existing network,
proceed with How to Change the IP Address of the Expansion Box
(Windows NT 4.0) on page 79.
T
76
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
If any problem comes up when you set up a peer-to-peer connection,
see Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Change the Host Table (Windows NT 4.0)
An IP address is a 32-bit number, usually written as a set of four 8-bit
numbers. For example, 192.100.100.98 is the default IP address of an
expansion box connected by Ethernet.
You can assign one or more alias names to each IP address via the host
table.
To edit the host table
1
Open a DOS window.
2
Change to %System_ROOT%\system32\drivers\etc.
3
Type edit hosts.
4
Modify the host table according to your needs and save the
changes. The file hosts.sam can be used as an example of a host
file.
N
Lines beginning with “#” are comments. Multiple aliases for the same
IP address must be separated by a space.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
77
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into
a Network
(Windows NT 4.0)
The following instructions show how to integrate an expansion box
into an existing network step-by-step:
1. A peer-to-peer connection is needed temporarily to change the IP
address of the expansion box. Refer to How to Set Up a Peer-toPeer Connection (Windows NT 4.0) on page 75.
2. The IP address of the expansion box must be changed to comply
with the IP addresses used in the network. Refer to How to
Change the IP Address of the Expansion Box (Windows NT 4.0) on
page 79.
3. After you have changed the IP address of the expansion box, you
can restore the previous IP address of the host PC. Refer to How to
Restore the TCP/IP Configuration of the PC (Windows NT 4.0) on
page 80.
4. Finish the work with How to Connect the Expansion Box to the
Network and Test the Connection (Windows NT 4.0) on page 81.
78
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Change the IP Address of the Expansion Box
(Windows NT 4.0)
N
■ Before trying to change the IP address, be sure that you have
tested the peer-to-peer connection to your expansion box via the
ping command.
■ The IP address of the expansion box can be changed only if the old
IP address is known and the host can connect to the expansion
box. If the IP address of the expansion box is unknown, refer to IP
Address lost on page 242.
To change the IP address of the expansion box
1
Contact your network administrator to obtain an unused
IP address that you can use for the expansion box.
2
To change the IP address, use the setip utility located in
%DSPACE_ROOT%\exe. In a DOS window, enter the command:
setip <current IP address> <new IP address>
The new IP address will be valid after rebooting the expansion box.
E
The default IP address of the expansion box is 192.100.100.98.
The IP address assigned to the host PC for the peer-to-peer
connection is 192.100.100.1. With these settings the host PC can
connect to the expansion box as described in How to Set Up a
Peer-to-Peer Connection (Windows NT 4.0) on page 75. Assume
that the IP address of the host PC was previously set to
183.27.33.14. The IP address to be used for the expansion box is
183.27.33.18. In a DOS window, enter the command:
setip 192.100.100.98 183.27.33.18
N
Write down the new IP address of the expansion box. You will
need it later to establish the connection.
3
Proceed with How to Restore the TCP/IP Configuration of the PC
(Windows NT 4.0) on page 80.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
79
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Restore the TCP/IP Configuration of the PC
(Windows NT 4.0)
For restoring the TCP/IP configuration of the host PC you need the
previous configuration (values and options) that you entered (or wrote
down) during installing (or setting up) the TCP/IP protocol (see How to
Prepare and Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol (Windows NT 4.0) on
page 71).
To restore the TCP/IP configuration of the host PC
1
From the Start menu, choose Settings – Control Panel.
2
Double-click Network in the Control Panel.
The current network configuration is displayed.
3
Click TCP/IP and select Properties.
4
On the IP address page of the TCP/IP Properties dialog, restore
the values and options you wrote down before.
5
Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties dialog.
6
Click OK to close the Network dialog.
7
In the System Settings Change dialog, click OK to confirm the
restart of the host PC.
8
80
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Proceed with How to Connect the Expansion Box to the Network
and Test the Connection (Windows NT 4.0) on page 81.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Connect the Expansion Box to the Network
and Test the Connection (Windows NT 4.0)
N
The supplied crossed-over patch cable cannot be used to connect the
expansion box to an existing network. Use a normal (non crossed-over)
cable.
To connect the expansion box to the network and test the
connection
N
1
Turn off the host PC and the expansion box.
2
Connect the expansion box and the host PC to the network.
3
Turn on the expansion box.
To avoid unpredictable errors, you should always turn on the
expansion box before the host PC.
4
Turn on the host PC.
The connection between the host PC and the expansion box can
now be tested.
5
In a DOS window, enter the command:
ping <IP address of the expansion box>
If the following message appears, the network connection is ready
for use (the values vary on different computers and networks). The
IP address 183.27.33.18 serves as an example.
Pinging 183.27.33.18 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
The network setup is now complete:
■ If needed, you can create a multiconnect group that allows you to
experiment with several expansion boxes at the same time. For
details, refer to Creating a Multiconnect Group on page 98.
■ Continue with Configuring the System on page 101.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
81
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
T
82
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
If any problem comes up when you integrate an expansion box in a
network, see Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Setting Up Under
Windows 2000/Windows XP
The connection between the PC (host) and an expansion box (client) is
based on the TCP/IP protocol provided by Windows 2000 or
Windows XP. There are two ways to connect a client to the host:
■ Peer-to-peer connection
The expansion box and the host PC are directly connected in a
peer-to-peer configuration, and neither the host nor the client is
connected to any other network.
■ Integration in an existing network
The expansion box becomes part of an existing network using
TCP/IP, for example, a local area network. In this case, the TCP/IP
protocol is already installed on the host PC.
Setting up procedure
To connect an expansion box via Ethernet under Windows 2000 or
Windows XP, follow the instructions given in the flow chart below. The
boxes in the flow chart refer to the corresponding sections in the text.
■ Begin with the instructions in How to Prepare and Set Up the
TCP/IP Configuration (Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 85.
■ To connect the expansion box directly to the host PC see How to
Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection (Windows 2000/Windows XP)
on page 89.
■ If you want to connect the expansion box to an existing network,
follow the instructions given in How to Integrate the Expansion
Box into a Network (Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 93
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
83
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting an Expansion
Box via Ethernet Under
Windows 2000/Windows XP
How to Prepare and Set Up
the TCP/IP Protocol see page 85
Is a
Network Adapter
Installed on
the PC?
No
Installing a Network
Adapter on the PC
see page 85
Yes
How to Change the TCP/IP
Configuration on the PC
see page 86
How to Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol
see page 88
Integrate
the Expansion
Box into an Existing
Network?
No
Yes
How to Integrate the Expansion
Box into a Network see page 93
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer
Connection
How to Set Up a
Peer-to-Peer Connection
see page 89
see page 89
How to Change the IP Address
see page 94
of the Expansion Box
How to Restore the TCP/IP
Configuration of the PC
see page 95
How to Connect the Expansion
Box to the Network and
Test the Connection
see page 96
Expansion Box
Ready for Use
84
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Prepare and Set Up the TCP/IP
Configuration
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
Depending on the installation in your host PC, refer to the following
instructions:
■ If there is no network adapter installed on your host PC, refer
to Installing a Network Adapter on the PC
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 85.
■ If a network adapter is already installed on your host PC, refer
to How to Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 88.
N
Changing the TCP/IP configuration under Windows 2000 or
Windows XP requires administrator rights.
Installing a Network Adapter on the PC
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
For an Ethernet connection the host PC and the expansion box require
a network adapter to establish communication. The expansion box
with Ethernet connection is delivered with a slot CPU with a built-in
10baseT (twisted pair, 10 Mbit/s) network adapter.
If there is no network adapter installed in your host PC, one of the
following adapter types has to be installed:
■ In a desktop PC: an ISA- or PCI-based network adapter
■ In a notebook PC: a PC card network adapter
Install and test the network adapter according to the manufacturer’s
documentation. The Windows online help provides useful information
and advice.
After installing a network adapter on the host PC, you must change
the TCP/IP configuration. For details see How to Change the TCP/IP
Configuration on the PC (Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 86.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
85
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Change the TCP/IP Configuration on the PC
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
After you have installed a network adapter on your host PC, you must
change the TCP/IP configuration on the host PC. During this
procedure, write down the previous TCP/IP configuration for later
restoration.
To change the TCP/IP configuration on the host PC
1
Windows 2000: From the Start menu, choose
Settings – Network and Dial-up Connections.
Windows XP: From the Start menu, choose (depending on your
PC configuration):
2
•
Settings or
•
Settings – Control Panel.
Only Windows XP: Depending on your PC configuration:
•
Select Network and Internet Connections – Network
Connections or
•
Double-click Network Connections.
3
Double-click Local Area Connection.
The Local Area Connection Status dialog opens.
4
Click Properties.
The Local Area Connection Properties dialog opens.
5
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog opens.
6
From the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog, write
down all configured values and options to restore them later.
7
From the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog, select Use
the Following IP address. Enter the value 192.100.100.1 in the
IP Address edit field.
8
In the Subnet Mask edit field, enter the value 255.255.255.0.
9
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
dialog.
10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog.
11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Status dialog.
86
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
12 If prompted, confirm to restart the host PC.
13 Check the correct installation of the TCP/IP protocol on the
host PC:
In a DOS window, enter the command: ping 127.0.0.1
If the TCP/IP protocol is installed properly, the following message
will appear (the values vary for different computers and networks):
Pinging 127.0.0.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 127.0.0.1: bytes=32 time<10ms
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
14 Proceed with
•
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 89 or
•
T
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into a Network
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 93.
If any problem comes up when you change the TCP/IP configuration,
see Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
87
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
If a network adapter and with this the TCP/IP protocol is already
installed on your host PC, you have to set up the TCP/IP protocol.
During this procedure, write down the previous TCP/IP configuration
for later restoration.
To set up the TCP/IP protocol
1
Windows 2000: From the Start menu, choose
Settings – Network and Dial-up Connections.
Windows XP: From the Start menu, choose (depending on your
PC configuration):
2
•
Settings or
•
Settings – Control Panel.
Only Windows XP: Depending on your PC configuration:
•
Select Network and Internet Connections – Network
Connections or
•
Double-click Network Connections.
3
Double-click Local Area Connection.
The Local Area Connection Status dialog opens.
4
Click Properties.
The Local Area Connection Properties dialog opens.
5
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog opens.
6
From the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog, write
down all configured values and options to restore them later.
7
From the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog, select Use
the Following IP address. Enter the value 192.100.100.1 in the
IP Address edit field.
8
In the Subnet Mask edit field, enter the value 255.255.255.0.
9
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
dialog.
10 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog.
11 Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Status dialog.
88
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
12 If prompted, confirm to restart the host PC.
13 Proceed with
•
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 89 or
•
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into a Network
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 93.
T
If any problem comes up when you set up the TCP/IP protocol, see
Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
How to Set Up a Peer-to-Peer Connection
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
After preparing and setting up the TCP/IP protocol, you can set up the
peer-to-peer connection.
A peer-to-peer connection between the host and client means that
neither the host nor the client is connected to any other network.
You must carry out this step, even if you want to integrate the
expansion box into an existing network. In that case the IP address of
the expansion box must comply with the conventions of the network.
So its default IP address (192.100.100.98) must be changed after
setting up a peer-to-peer connection between the host PC and the
expansion box.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
89
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
To set up and test a peer-to-peer connection
1
If the host PC is already part of an existing network, switch it off,
and disconnect it from the network.
2
Connect the expansion box to the host PC, using the supplied
crossed-over patch cable.
N
For a peer-to-peer connection, the crossed-over patch cable
supplied with the expansion box must be used. If connecting to an
existing network, for example, via a hub, a standard patch cable
must probably be used. If you are uncertain, ask your network
administrator.
3
Turn on the expansion box.
During booting, the expansion box beeps several times. The last
beep sequence indicates whether the default IP address is active
(three short beeps) or if the IP address has been changed by the
user (one long beep). In the following it is assumed that the
default IP address (192.100.100.98) is active.
90
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
4
N
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Turn on the host PC.
The host PC will take longer to boot and will display error
messages because of the missing connection to the network.
Ignore these error messages for now.
The connection between the host PC and the expansion box can
now be tested.
5
In a DOS window, enter the command: ping 192.100.100.98,
which is the default IP address of the expansion box.
If the following message appears, the peer-to-peer connection is
ready for use (the values vary on different computers and
networks):
Pinging 192.100.100.98 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 192.100.100.98: bytes=32 time<10ms
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
■ If the expansion box is used only in a peer-to-peer connection,
the network setup is now complete.
•
If needed, refer to How to Change the Host Table
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 92 to assign an alias
name to the expansion box IP address.
•
Continue with Configuring the System on page 101.
■ If the expansion box is to be used in an existing network,
proceed with How to Change the IP Address of the Expansion Box
(Windows 2000/Window XP) on page 94.
T
If any problem comes up when you set up a peer-to-peer connection,
see Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
91
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Change the Host Table
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
An IP address is a 32-bit number, usually written as a set of four 8-bit
numbers. For example, 192.100.100.98 is the default IP address of an
expansion box connected by Ethernet.
You can assign one or more alias names to each IP address via the host
table.
To edit the host table
1
Open a DOS window.
2
Change to %System_ROOT%\system32\drivers\etc.
3
Type edit hosts.
4
Modify the host table according to your needs and save the
changes. The file hosts.sam can be used as an example of a host
file.
N
92
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Lines beginning with “#” are comments. Multiple aliases for the same
IP address must be separated by a space.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Integrate the Expansion Box into
a Network
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
The following instructions show how to integrate an expansion box
into an existing network step-by-step:
1. A peer-to-peer connection is needed temporarily to change the IP
address of the expansion box. Refer to How to Set Up a Peer-toPeer Connection (Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 89.
2. The IP address of the expansion box must be changed to comply
with the IP addresses used in the network. Refer to How to
Change the IP Address of the Expansion Box
(Windows 2000/Window XP) on page 94.
3. After you have changed the IP address of the expansion box, you
can restore the previous IP address of the host PC. Refer to How to
Restore the TCP/IP Configuration of the PC
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 95.
4. Finish the work with How to Connect the Expansion Box to the
Network and Test the Connection (Windows 2000/Windows XP)
on page 96.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
93
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Change the IP Address of the Expansion Box
(Windows 2000/Window XP)
N
■ Before trying to change the IP address, be sure that you have
tested the peer-to-peer connection to your expansion box via the
ping command.
■ The IP address of the expansion box can be changed only if the old
IP address is known and the host can connect to the expansion
box. If the IP address of the expansion box is unknown, refer to IP
Address lost on page 242.
1
Contact your network administrator to obtain an unused IP
address that you can use for the expansion box.
2
To change the IP address, use the setip utility located in
%DSPACE_ROOT%\exe. In a DOS window, enter the command:
setip <current IP address> <new IP address>
The new IP address will be valid after rebooting the expansion box.
E
The default IP address of the expansion box is 192.100.100.98.
The IP address assigned to the host PC for the peer-to-peer
connection is 192.100.100.1. With these settings the host PC can
connect to the expansion box as described in How to Set Up a
Peer-to-Peer Connection (Windows 2000/Windows XP) on
page 89. Assume that the IP address of the host PC was previously
set to 183.27.33.14. The IP address to be used for the expansion
box is 183.27.33.18. In a DOS box, enter the command:
setip 192.100.100.98 183.27.33.18
N
Write down the new IP address of the expansion box. You will
need it later to establish the connection.
3
94
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Proceed with How to Restore the TCP/IP Configuration of the PC
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 95.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Restore the TCP/IP Configuration of the PC
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
For restoring the TCP/IP configuration of the host PC you need the
values and options, which you wrote down during setting up the
TCP/IP protocol (see How to Set Up the TCP/IP Protocol
(Windows 2000/Windows XP) on page 88).
To restore the TCP/IP configuration of the host PC
1
Windows 2000: From the Start menu, choose
Settings – Network and Dial-up Connections.
Windows XP: From the Start menu, choose (depending on your
PC configuration):
2
•
Settings or
•
Settings – Control Panel.
Only Windows XP: Depending on your PC configuration:
•
Select Network and Internet Connections – Network
Connections or
•
Double-click Network Connections.
3
Double-click Local Area Connection.
The Local Area Connection Status dialog opens.
4
Click Properties.
The Local Area Connection Properties dialog opens.
5
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog opens.
6
Enter all the configured values and options you wrote down
before.
7
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
dialog.
8
Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties dialog.
9
Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Status dialog.
10 If prompted, confirm to restart the host PC.
11 Proceed with How to Connect the Expansion Box to the Network
and Test the Connection (Windows 2000/Windows XP) on
page 96.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
95
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Connect the Expansion Box to the Network
and Test the Connection
(Windows 2000/Windows XP)
N
The supplied crossed-over patch cable cannot be used to connect the
expansion box to an existing network. Use a normal (non crossed-over)
cable.
To connect the expansion box to the network and test the
connection
N
1
Turn off the host PC and the expansion box.
2
Connect the expansion box and the host PC to the network.
3
Turn on the expansion box.
To avoid unpredictable errors, you should always turn on the
expansion box before the host PC.
4
Turn on the host PC.
The connection between the host PC and the expansion box can
now be tested.
5
In a DOS window, enter the command:
ping <IP address of the expansion box>.
If the following message appears, the network connection is ready
for use (the values vary on different computers and networks). The
IP address 183.27.33.18 serves as an example.
Pinging 183.27.33.18 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
Reply from 183.27.33.18: bytes=32 time<10ms
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
TTL=32
The network setup is now complete:
■ If needed, you can create a multiconnect group that allows you to
experiment with several expansion boxes at the same time. For
details, refer to Creating a Multiconnect Group on page 98.
■ Continue with Configuring the System on page 101.
96
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
T
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
If any problem comes up when you integrate an expansion box in a
network, see Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 in the
troubleshooting chapter.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
97
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Creating a Multiconnect Group
Multiconnect groups allow you to experiment with several expansion
boxes connected to the host PC via Ethernet (= several network
clients) at the same time.
A multiconnect group is handled in the same way as a single network
client.
N
■ Within a multiconnect group, the port addresses (I/O base
addresses) of all included dSPACE boards must be unique.
For detailed instructions on how to set the port addresses, refer to
How to Change I/O Base Addresses on page 38.
■ AutoBoot option for expansion boxes does not work with
multiconnect groups.
Creating
multiconnect groups
When creating a multiconnect group, the hardware does not change.
A multiconnect group is initialized by a group description within the
groups description file %DSPACE_CONFIG%\dsgroups.ini. The file may
contain several group descriptions, each defining a separate
multiconnect group. Different group descriptions may include the
same members.
Syntax of the
group description file
A group description consists of an arbitrary group name and its
members. Each member identifies an expansion box by its IP address
or alias name as assigned in the host table. Each group description
ends with an empty line:
[<group name>]
member=<IP address or alias of the network client>
…
member=<IP address or alias of the network client>
…
[<group name>]
member=<IP address or alias of the network client>
…
member=<IP address or alias of the network client>
98
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box
N
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
■ member is the only keyword in the group description file. Lines that
start with an unknown keyword are ignored. They are not handled
as errors.
■ Group names and network aliases must not consist of more than
15 characters (ASCII – no spaces).
The initial %DSPACE_ROOT%\CONFIG\dsgroups.ini file contains an
example of a group description.
Accessing a
multiconnect group
Since a multiconnect group is handled in the same way as a single
network client, you connect it via the Change Connection dialog. For
details, refer to How to Set the Connection Mode on page 103.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
99
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Setting Up an Ethernet Connection Between PC and Expansion Box ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
100
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Configuring the System
The dSPACE real-time hardware is managed by the Platform Manager
integrated in ControlDesk. For information on how to access the
Platform Manager, see How to Run ControlDesk on page 102.
Registration
After you start ControlDesk, you can use the Platform Manager to set
the connection mode and register your simulation platform: see
Configuring the DS1103 PPC Controller Board on page 103.
Platform properties
To view the current settings and properties of the registered platforms,
see How to View the Board Properties on page 107.
Configuration check
After you configure your system, you should check if your platform is
ready to run real-time applications: see How to Verify the
Configuration on page 108.
Updating the firmware
The DS1103 contains firmware installed in the flash memory of the
board. If you install a new dSPACE Release it may contain newer
firmware. In this case the firmware must be updated. Refer to
Updating the Firmware on page 109.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
101
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Configuring the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Run ControlDesk
After installing the dSPACE software, ControlDesk is available in the
Windows Start menu and as an icon on the desktop.
Method
To start ControlDesk
1
In the Windows Start menu, choose Programs – dSPACE Tools –
ControlDesk.
2
In the Navigator, click the Platform tab.
The Platform Navigator appears. With the Platform Navigator, it is
possible to register boards and to manually download applications
to your simulation platform.
Menu bar
Toolbars
Navigator
Tool window
Status bar
File selector
For more information on ControlDesk and its features, refer to the
ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
102
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Configuring the System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Configuring the DS1103 PPC
Controller Board
If you have used the Plug & Play mode when installing the
DS1103 PPC Controller Board (see Setting up the DS1103 on
page 36), the board has been configured automatically. No further
configuration is necessary. When starting ControlDesk’s Platform
Manager, the DS1103 PPC Controller Board is displayed in the
Navigator in the top left of the main window. The system is ready to
run real-time applications on the board.
Setting the connection
mode and registering
the board
If you have changed the factory-adjusted I/O base address – that is, the
Plug & Play mode is disabled – you have to
■ set the connection mode – see below –, and
■ register the DS1103 using the Platform Manager – see How to
Register a DS1103 on page 106.
How to Set the Connection Mode
dSPACE real-time boards can be connected to the host via a bus
interface or via Ethernet. The type of connection selectable via
ControlDesk must suit your installation. The Platform Navigator shows
only the boards that are connected and registered.
Connection modes
The Change Connection dialog is used to select the desired
connection mode. The following table shows which connection mode
you have to specify:
dSPACE System Installed ...
Required Connection Mode
... in the host PC
Bus connection
... in the expansion box, and connected
via Link Boards, e.g., the DS815/DS814
Bus connection
... in the expansion box, and connected
via Ethernet
Network connection
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
103
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Configuring the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
T
Using network
connection
The bus connection is the default setting. You only need to change the
connection mode if the board is installed in an expansion box
connected via Ethernet.
When Ethernet is being used, there may be network clients. The
network connection actually being used determines the network client
and thus the boards that can be accessed. The Platform Navigator
shows only the boards that are connected and registered.
Multiconnect group
You can use a multiconnect group that allows you to experiment with
several expansion boxes connected to the host PC via Ethernet
(= several network clients) at the same time. A multiconnect group is
handled in the same way as a single network client.
For information on creating a multiconnect group, refer to Creating a
Multiconnect Group on page 98.
Using remote
connection
The Remote Connection allows you to connect several PCs to one
realtime system via Ethernet. In this way, you can work simultaneously
with the same experiment via different PCs. For detailed information
on the remote connection, refer to Remote Control in the ControlDesk
Experiment Guide.
104
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Method
Configuring the System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
To set the connection mode
1
From the menu bar, choose Platform – Change Connection... to
open the Change Connection dialog
2
Select the desired connection mode in this dialog.
If the board is connected to the host PC via Ethernet, choose the
connection mode Network Connection in the Change
Connection dialog, then select the Network Client.
The network client is identified by its IP address or alias specified in
the host table (refer to Setting Up an Ethernet Connection
Between PC and Expansion Box on page 67).
Multiconnect groups are also available in the Network Client list.
After you have selected a multiconnect group, the group is
displayed in the Platform Navigator. You have to register the
dSPACE boards belonging to the multiconnect group in the same
way as usual.
3
Click OK to apply your settings.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
105
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Configuring the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Register a DS1103
To register a DS1103, carry out the following instructions.
Method
To register a DS1103
1
From the menu bar, choose Platform – Initialization – Register...
to call up the Register Board dialog.
2
In the Register Board dialog, select “DS1103 PPC Controller
Board” as the Type.
3
Enter the I/O base address selected on the board in the Port
Address edit field as a hexadecimal number, or use the address
switches to adjust the address.
4
Click Register.
The DS1103 is registered and ControlDesk returns to the Platform
Navigator.
Automatic
firmware update
When you register the board, ControlDesk’s Platform Manager will
automatically update its firmware to the available version if the current
version is lower than the available one. This is the default setting after
you install the dSPACE software. You can also switch off automatic
updating. For details, see Platform Manager Page in the ControlDesk
Reference.
106
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Configuring the System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to View the Board
Properties
After registration, the board properties To view the board
properties
1
In the Platform Navigator, double-click the corresponding DS1103.
2
In the Processor Board Properties dialog , check the individual
tabs.
T
You can also select the board on the Platform page of the Navigator
and choose Platform – Properties from the menu bar.
E
N
The displayed board properties cannot be changed.
For details, see Platform Properties in the ControlDesk Reference.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
107
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Configuring the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Verify the
Configuration
After configuration, the system is ready to run real-time applications.
To verify whether your DS1103 PPC Controller Board works correctly, it
is recommended that you load the system check application
smd_1103_ch.sdf located in the directory
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\Check\.
To verify the configuration
➤ In ControlDesk’s File Selector, change to the given folder, select
the system description file (SDF), and drag & drop it onto the
DS1103 board icon in the Platform Navigator.
If no error message is displayed in the Log Viewer, the board is
installed correctly.
108
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Configuring the System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Updating the Firmware
The DS1103 contains firmware installed in the flash memory of the
board.
After you install the dSPACE Release, you can update the firmware.
The table below shows the path of the firmware installed from the
dSPACE Release. You have to specify this path if you update your
firmware manually.
Current version
Board
Firmware Type
Path of Firmware Coming with the
dSPACE Release
DS1103
– CAN firmware
– Slave DSP firmware
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Ds1103\CAN\Firmware
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Ds1103\SlaveDSP\Firmware
The firmware installed in the board’s flash memory is the current
firmware version. It is detected automatically by the Platform Manager.
Available version
The firmware contained in your current dSPACE installation is the
available firmware version. The Platform Manager detects it
automatically.
Required version
The firmware needed by an application you download to your
real-time processor is the required firmware version. This information
is shown on the Advanced page of the Firmware Management dialog.
N
User firmware
The firmware is downward compatible: You can download an
application to your hardware if the current firmware version is higher
than or equal to the required firmware version.
You can extend the functionality of the firmware provided by the
dSPACE installation. This is done by using your own firmware based on
the dSPACE firmware (user firmware). The Firmware Management
dialog also displays the dSPACE firmware version that the user
firmware is based on.
Boot firmware
Since Release 3.4, the flash application is no longer deleted by a
firmware update. The flash application and the bootstrap code are
saved before and loaded after the update.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
109
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Configuring the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Firmware update
If you download an application requiring a higher firmware version
than the current one, you will get an error message. If your board
contains user firmware, you will get an error message if the required
firmware version is higher than that displayed in the Based on
dSPACE version field in the Current Firmware frame of the
Firmware Management dialog. In these cases, you have to update the
firmware.
Automatic update
If you use the firmware provided by dSPACE, when you register the
board, ControlDesk’s Platform Manager will automatically update its
firmware to the available version if the current version is lower than
the available one. This is the default setting after you install the
dSPACE software.
You can also switch off automatic updating. For details, see Platform
Manager Page in the ControlDesk Reference.
N
Some dSPACE boards can be operated in plug & play mode. Up to
dSPACE Release 3.1, the firmware cannot be updated automatically.
For dSPACE Release 3.2 or later, all plug & play boards support
automatic update of the firmware. In this case, the firmware is
updated automatically by starting the simulation or changing the
connection.
Manual update
If you use user firmware or switched off automatic updating you will
be prompted to update your firmware if the application you want to
download requires a firmware version higher than the current one.
Verify boot firmware
Platforms that support boot firmware provide the Verify Boot Firmware
command. You can call this feature via the context menu in the
Platform Navigator and in several cases it is performed automatically.
Refer to Verify Boot Firmware in the ControlDesk Reference.
110
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Configuring the System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Update the Firmware
You can update your firmware manually.
N
Method
If your board is installed in an expansion box connected to your
host PC via Ethernet, updating the board’s firmware may take some
time. You are given status information during the firmware update.
To update the firmware manually
1
Select Update Firmware… from the context menu of the
corresponding board in ControlDesk’s Platform Navigator.
The Firmware Management dialog opens.
2
From the Select Firmware Type list, select the firmware type you
want to update.
3
In the Object file edit field, specify the path of the firmware to be
downloaded to your board. Use the Browse button for this
purpose.
N
The firmware path is set by default from the RTLib installation.
4
Click the Update Firmware button.
The firmware will be updated to the available version.
5
N
When the update is complete, the Close button on the Firmware
Management dialog is enabled. Click it to close the dialog.
You have to update the firmware for each firmware type individually.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
111
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Configuring the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
112
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Implementing and
Handling Applications
After you install and configure your system, you are ready to
implement, download and experiment with your control algorithm.
Development Steps
1. The first step is to implement your control algorithm. For this
purpose, you can either embed the blocks provided by dSPACE’s
Real-Time Interface (RTI) in a Simulink model or use RTLib’s
functions to handcode your application directly in C. For some
basic information on this step, see Implementing Models on
page 115.
2. Then build your model and download it to your dSPACE real-time
hardware. For detailed instructions on how to download, start and
stop an application, see Handling Real-Time Applications on
page 122.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
113
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
3. As soon as the real-time application is running on your hardware,
you can use ControlDesk to experiment with it. For some basic
information on how to create a ControlDesk experiment and
observe the variables and change parameters of a running
real-time application, see Experimenting with ControlDesk on
page 126.
114
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Implementing Models
Basically, there are two ways to create real-time applications to be
implemented on your dSPACE hardware.
Using RTI
If you use MATLAB/Simulink for constructing control models, the
C code is automatically generated by the Real-Time Workshop in
conjunction with dSPACE’s Real-Time Interface (RTI). RTI is the
interface between Simulink and the various dSPACE platforms. See
Implementing Simulink Models Using Real-Time Interface on
page 116.
Handcoding
An algorithm can also be handcoded in C. In addition to the necessary
compilers, the tools required to generate object files are part of the
dSPACE software. See How to Implement C Models on page 121.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
115
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Implementing Simulink Models Using
Real-Time Interface
It is assumed that MATLAB, Simulink, Real-Time Workshop, and
Real-Time Interface (RTI) for the DS1103 PPC Controller Board
(RTI1103) are properly installed. See below and How to Work with a
Model on page 118.
How to Start RTI1103
To start RTI1103, the following instructions apply.
To start RTI1103
1
Make sure that the required licenses are available and activated.
For information on handling the license mechanism, refer to
Protected Products and Required Licenses in the dSPACE Software
Installation and Management Guide.
2
Open ControlDesk (via Programs – dSPACE Tools – ControlDesk
in the Windows Start menu) and specify the DS1103 as the
working board (via Platform – Set Working Board from the
menu bar). For details, see How to Set the Working Board in the
ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
116
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
3
Start MATLAB.
4
In the Select dSPACE RTI Platform Support dialog, select
RTI1103.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
5
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
At the MATLAB prompt, enter simulink.
The Simulink Library Browser appears in a separate window.
6
T
In the Simulink Library Browser window, you can click the
+/– signs to browse through the dSPACE RTI1103 library.
You can also right-click a library icon and choose from the context
menu Open the <Name of the Library> Library to open the
corresponding library.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
117
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
To open a dSPACE board library from the MATLAB prompt
➤ In the MATLAB Command Window, enter rti1103.
The dSPACE board library for the DS1103 is displayed.
The DS1103 board library contains information, demos and the icons
available with the DS1103. Double-click the items to obtain more
information.
To switch to another board library
➤ In the MATLAB Command Window, enter
rti<Name of the Library> to start the appropriate library, for
example rti1005.
How to Work with a Model
In the following, the demo model smd_1103_sl is used to describe
how to use the RTI1103 board library. It simulates a damped
spring-mass system stimulated by a square-wave signal. It does not
require any I/O hardware and thus serves as a ready-to-use example. If
you want to use a handcoded application, use the smd_1103_hc
demo – with the smd_1103_hc.sdf SDF file – instead (see How to
Implement C Models on page 121).
The related files are located in the directories
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\GettingStarted\HandCode or
...\GettingStarted\Simulink.
118
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
To work with a model
1
In the Library: rtilib1103 window, double-click DEMOS.
2
Double-click the box titled Spring - Mass - Damper in the
Library: rti1103demolib window to open the Simulink model
smd_1103_sl.
The Simulink model smd_1103_sl is displayed in an extra window.
3
To examine the model, double-click its blocks.
4
From the menu bar of the Model window, choose Tools –
Real-Time Workshop – Options to view the simulation
parameters.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
119
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
The Simulation Parameters dialog opens.
5
On the Real-Time Workshop page, check if the system target file
rti1103.tlc, the template makefile rti1103.tmf, and the make
command make_rti are specified. If necessary, change the entries
(according to the illustration above).
6
Click Build to build and download the real-time application to the
DS1103.
The smd_1103_sl.sdf system description fileand the real-time
application are created. The latter is downloaded to the DS1103
and started automatically.
7
Use ControlDesk to stop and restart the real-time application.
Refer to Experimenting with ControlDesk on page 126.
If the real-time application - stored in the current MATLAB working
folder - is stopped, it can be downloaded to the DS1103 again using
the SDF file in ControlDesk. A new build process is not needed if you
do not change the Simulink model in the meantime.
To find out the current MATLAB working folder
➤ In the MATLAB Command Window, enter pwd.
120
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Implement C Models
To demonstrate how to proceed without MATLAB and Simulink, the
C-coded example smd_1103_hc.c is used. This model does not require
any I/O hardware. It simulates a damped spring-mass system
stimulated by a square-wave signal. The parameters are spring, mass
and damper.
To compile and link the application, you can use the down1103 utility in
a DOS window to call the makefile. After the object file is downloaded
and started, the RTP error check utility is called automatically.
To edit and download an application
1
Open the file %DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\GettingStarted
\HandCode\smd_1103_hc.c using a text editor of your choice.
2
Browse through the source code, but do not alter the code yet.
3
To invoke down1103, in a DOS window change to the directory
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\GettingStarted\HandCode and type
down1103 smd_1103_hc
The object file smd_1103_hc.ppc is generated, downloaded and
started.
4
Use ControlDesk to stop the real-time application:
Select the DS1103 in the Platform Navigator, and click the
Stop RTP/Simulation icon in the Platform toolbar.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
121
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Handling Real-Time
Applications
Handling real-time applications on the DS1103 means downloading,
starting and stopping applications on the real-time processor.
For instructions, see How to Handle Applications on the DS1103 on
page 123.
Applications for a slave DSP are loaded and started together with the
real-time application running on the corresponding main processor.
For details, see How to Handle Applications on a Slave DSP in the
ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
scoutcmd
To download and start applications on the real-time hardware, it is
possible to use the Platform Manager as a batch client using the
command scoutcmd –b <dsxxxx> (<dsxxxx> denotes the board you
want to download the application to) and additional parameters (see
How to Use Scoutcmd to Load and Start Applications on page 125
and Handling Applications Using Command Line Parameters in the
ControlDesk Experiment Guide).
122
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Handle Applications on the
DS1103
To handle applications on the DS1103, the following instructions
apply:
To download and start a real-time application on the PowerPC
➤ In the File Selector, select the system description file (SDF) for the
real-time processor, and drag & drop it onto the board icon in the
Platform Navigator.
The object file is loaded to and started on the real-time processor.
Alternatively, from the menu bar, choose Platform –
Application – Load Application.
Stopping a
real-time application
If you stop an application via ControlDesk‘s Stop Real-Time
Processor command, the processor will be reset immediately.
Therefore, the termination code will not be executed and the
background task will no longer be active. As a result, the I/O will not
output the termination values of the application. To avoid problems
with undefined termination values, use RTI’s simulation control
(RUN/STOP mechanism) for stopping and reloading applications (see
Simulation Control (RUN/STOP Mechanism) in the RTI and RTI-MP
Implementation Guide).
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
123
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
To stop a real-time application
1
In the Platform Navigator, select the board.
2
From the menu bar, choose Platform – Application –
Stop Real-Time Processor.
Or you can click the Stop RTP/Simulation icon in the Platform
toolbar.
The program running on the real-time processor is stopped.
To reload a real-time application
1
In the Platform Navigator, select the board.
2
From the menu bar, choose Platform – Application –
Reload Application.
Or you can click the Reload Application/Start Simulation icon in the
Platform toolbar.
The application that was previously downloaded to the real-time
processor is started.
124
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Use Scoutcmd to Load and Start
Applications
To download and start applications on the real-time hardware, you can
use the Platform Manager as a batch client using the scoutcmd
command and additional parameters.
To load an application using scoutcmd
➤ In a DOS window, enter scoutcmd -b ds1103 test.sdf
The test.sdf application is loaded to the board, and the RTP is
started.
For further information on scoutcmd and its parameters, refer to
Handling Applications Using Command Line Parameters in the
ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
125
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Experimenting with
ControlDesk
To observe the behavior of the real-time application and to change
application-specific parameters, use dSPACE’s experimentation tool
ControlDesk.
For detailed information on ControlDesk and its features, refer to the
ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
Required files
To experiment with a real-time application, three application-specific
files are required: see How to Generate the Required Files on
page 127.
Demo model
The demo model smd_1103_hc introduces you to ControlDesk’s
experimentation features. If you want to use a Simulink application,
use the demo smd_1103_sl instead.
The related files are located in
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\GettingStarted\HandCode or
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\GettingStarted\Simulink
For instructions on how to monitor the variables and change the
parameters of a running application using ControlDesk, see How to
Use ControlDesk on page 128.
126
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Generate the Required Files
Three application-specific files are required when working with
ControlDesk:
TRC and MAP file
The file with the extension TRC provides information on the available
variables and how they are grouped. The MAP file, which is always
created at the end of compilation, maps symbolic names to physical
addresses. It is generated by the Microtec PowerPC compiler. The way
TRC files are generated depends on the method used for
implementation – either via RTI/Simulink or via handcoding in C.
SDF file
The system description (SDF) file specifies which executable is
downloaded onto which processor. The way the SDF file is generated
depends on the method used for implementation.
T
When you load an SDF file to your system, the executable and all files
related to the experiment are loaded automatically.
Using RTI and Simulink
RTI automatically generates the SDF file, the TRC file(s) and the
MAP file when generating and compiling the code.
C-Coded Models
In smd_1103_hc.c, services have been included to make the application
accessible to ControlDesk. The application-specific SDF and TRC file for
ControlDesk must be created manually. You can use an existing file,
such as smd_1103_hc.trc, as a template to create the TRC file for your
application.
For information on how to write your own TRC file, refer to Syntax of
the TRC File in the ControlDesk Reference. To create and edit an SDF
file, you can use ControlDesk’s SDF File Editor or the Save Current
Configuration command.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
127
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Use ControlDesk
To observe the variables of a running real-time application, you have to
create a ControlDesk layout with an instrument such as a plotter, and
connect the instrument to the variables to be observed. For detailed
instructions, see below.
For instructions on how to change the parameters of a running
application with ControlDesk, see To use the demo experiment for
ControlDesk on page 133.
To observe the system behavior
1
Start ControlDesk.
2
If you have not yet registered your dSPACE hardware, follow the
instructions in Configuring the System on page 101.
N
Working with more than one dSPACE board in plug & play
configuration may cause assignment problems. For details, refer to
Problems with Multiple Plug & Play Boards on page 238.
3
If ControlDesk’s Platform Navigator displays more than one
dSPACE board in your system, it may be necessary to specify the
DS1103 as the working board: In the Platform Navigator, you can
recognize the working board by its bold print. If the DS1103 is not
the current working board, choose Platform – Set Working
Board … to call up the Set Working Board dialog.
4
Use the Platform Navigator to load the SDF file smd_1103_hc.sdf
from %DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\GettingStarted\HandCode. For
information on how to download, start and stop a real-time
application on your system, see Handling Real-Time Applications
on page 122.
128
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The hierarchical structure of the model and its variables are
displayed in the Variable Browser, a page of the Tool Window.
5
In the Variable Browser, click the trace group Model to display the
variables (a, v, x, f, ...) of that block in the Showlist on the right.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
129
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
6
To display the behavior of the system, choose New – Layout from
the File menu. Two new windows will appear: The Layout
window and the Instrument Selector (on the right side in the
illustration below).
7
Do the following to build an instrument panel within the layout
window:
•
In the Instrument Selector, click the instrument group
containing the desired instrument (for example, Data
Acquisition).
•
In the Instrument Selector, click the icon of the instrument
(for example, a PlotterArray).
•
130
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
In the layout window, draw a rectangle using the mouse.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
•
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The new instrument is opened in the layout window, and an
icon for the instrument is added to the Instrumentation
Navigator. The red frame of the instrument indicates that
there is no valid data connection yet.
•
In the Variable Browser, choose a signal, and drag & drop it
onto the instrument (for example, x). The red frame disappears
when the connection is built.
8
Select the instrument, and choose Properties from the context
menu to display or change the properties of the instrument.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
131
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
9
From the menu bar, choose Instrumentation – Animation mode
to start the animation. In the following example there is one
plotter to display the signal x.
10 To add new instruments to the layout or to change the properties
of existing instruments, choose Instrumentation – Edit Mode.
11 From the menu bar, choose File – Save to save the new layout.
Data connections describe the connection between variables of the
real-time application and a ControlDesk instrument. To save data
connections, you should create an experiment and add the layout to it.
For further information, refer to Saving and Loading Instrument Panels
in the ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
132
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
To use the demo experiment for ControlDesk
1
Start ControlDesk.
2
From the menu bar, choose File – Open Experiment to open the
experiment smd_1103_hc.cdx from
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\GettingStarted\HandCode.
ControlDesk will open the experiment together with all the related
files.
3
Use the Platform Navigator to load the file smd_1103_hc.sdf from
the same folder.
4
Close all windows except the instrument panel DS1103
Spring-Mass-Damper Demo (SMD).
5
From the menu bar, choose Instrumentation – Animation mode
to start the animation.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
133
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
6
Change the parameter Mass m to 0.10 with the slider, and
observe the system behavior in the plotter.
134
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
7
Implementing and Handling Applications
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Change the Frequency f to 100.0 with the slider, and observe the
system behavior in the plotter without stopping the Animation
mode.
For more information on ControlDesk and its features, refer to the
ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
135
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Implementing and Handling Applications ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
136
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connecting External
Devices to the dSPACE
System
Prior to connecting external devices to the board or a connector panel,
ensure you have familiarized yourself with the related instructions,
provided in:
■ How to Connect External Devices to a Board on page 138
■ How to Connect External Devices to a Connector Panel on
page 140
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
137
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting External Devices to the dSPACE System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Connect External
Devices to a Board
To connect external devices to the DS1103
C
CAUTION! Connecting external devices while the power supply
is switched on may damage the dSPACE hardware.
■ Do not connect or disconnect any device while the power supply is
switched on.
■ Turn off the host PC, the expansion box (if used), and the external
devices beforehand.
1
Turn off all external devices which are to be connected to the
dSPACE system
2
N
C
Turn off the host PC.
Do not switch off the expansion box while the host PC is still
running. This might lead to unpredictable errors.
3
Turn off the expansion box and all devices connected to it.
4
Disconnect the host PC, the expansion box and all devices
connected to them from the power supply.
WARNING! Hazardous voltages.
Risk of electric shock and/or damage to the hardware.
■ Do not connect any high-voltage devices to the I/O connectors of
the hardware.
■ Do not apply voltages/currents outside the specified ranges to the
connector pins. The isolation of the panels has been designed for
low-voltage operation only.
138
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
5
Connect the devices belonging to your application to the board.
6
Reconnect the host PC, the expansion box and all external devices
to the power supply.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
7
N
Connecting External Devices to the dSPACE System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Turn on the expansion box and all devices connected to it.
To avoid unpredictable errors, you should always turn on the
expansion box before the host PC.
8
Turn on the host PC.
The host PC should boot as usual.
9
Turn on all external devices connected to the dSPACE system.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
139
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting External Devices to the dSPACE System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Connect External
Devices to a Connector Panel
To connect external devices to a connector panel
C
CAUTION! Connecting external devices while the power supply
is switched on may damage the dSPACE hardware.
■ Do not connect or disconnect any device while the power supply is
switched on.
■ Turn off the host PC, the expansion box (if used), and the external
devices beforehand.
1
Turn off all external devices which are to be connected to the
dSPACE system.
2
N
C
Turn off the host PC.
Do not switch off the expansion box while the host PC is still
running. This might lead to unpredictable errors.
3
Turn off the expansion box and all devices connected to it.
4
Disconnect the host PC, the expansion box and all devices
connected to them from the power supply.
WARNING! Hazardous voltages.
Risk of electric shock and/or damage to the hardware.
■ Do not connect any high-voltage devices to the I/O connectors of
the hardware.
■ Do not apply voltages/currents outside the specified ranges to the
connector pins. The isolation of the panels has been designed for
low-voltage operation only.
140
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
5
Connect the devices belonging to your application to the panel.
6
Reconnect the host PC, the expansion box and all external devices
to the power supply.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
7
N
Connecting External Devices to the dSPACE System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Turn on the expansion box and all devices connected to it.
To avoid unpredictable errors, you should always turn on the
expansion box before the host PC.
8
Turn on the host PC.
The host PC should boot as usual.
9
Turn on all external devices connected to the dSPACE system.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
141
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connecting External Devices to the dSPACE System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
142
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Using the AutoBoot
Option
If a control algorithm for a vehicle was designed in the laboratory
using a dSPACE system, the final tests must be performed in a real
vehicle. The system is transferred to the vehicle for testing. This should
be possible if your system is not connected to your host PC, and it
should not be necessary for drivers to have computer experience.
This is where AutoBoot Option comes in handy.
N
For information on the necessary steps for migration from the
Autoboot environment of former dSPACE Releases (up to dSPACE
Release 3.4) to the new Autoboot environment shipped since dSPACE
Release 3.5, refer to:
%DSPACE_ROOT%\AbxBoot\Migration\MIGRATION.TXT
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
143
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Using the AutoBoot Option ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Using the
A real-time application that was developed in the laboratory can be
AutoBoot option
loaded to a CompactFlash card using the dSPACE system. After you
install the hardware and configure the CompactFlash card, your
real-time hardware is able to autoboot an application when you power
up the expansion box, which must be equipped with a slot CPU.
After power-up, you can also connect a PC via a network connection
to run ControlDesk.
Installing the
AutoBoot option
Before you can install the hardware from the AutoBoot package – see
Components of the AutoBoot Package on page 145 for details – your
system has to fulfill the Installation Requirements on page 146. Then
you can install the AutoBoot package: see How to Install the AutoBoot
Hardware in the Expansion Box on page 147.
Preparing the
CompactFlash card
Autobooting an
application
T
After you install the AutoBoot package successfully, you have to
format the CompactFlash card (File System: FAT). See How to Format
the CompactFlash Card on page 149.
For information on how to autoboot an application via AutoBoot
Option, see How to Autoboot an Application on page 150.
■ For general instructions on using AutoBoot Option, see Further
Information on Using AutoBoot Option on page 153.
■ For a brief overview of the problems relating to Autoboot Option
and their solutions, see Problems with AutoBoot Option on
page 248.
144
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Using the AutoBoot Option
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Components of the AutoBoot
Package
The hardware and software required by Autoboot Option is provided
by the AutoBoot package.
N
For information on the necessary steps for migration from the
Autoboot environment of former dSPACE Releases (up to dSPACE
Release 3.4) to the new Autoboot environment shipped since dSPACE
Release 3.5, refer to:
%DSPACE_ROOT%\AbxBoot\Migration\MIGRATION.TXT
Hardware provided by
The AutoBoot package contains the following hardware components:
the AutoBoot package
■ One PC card reader. The PC card reader package consists of the
board itself and documentation.
■ One CompactFlash card (SanDisk 128 MB,
Model SDCFB-128-101-00).
N
It is recommended to use a SanDisk CompactFlash card, Model
SDCFB-128-101-00, for proper function. CompactFlash cards from
other manufacturers or cards with a different memory size may
also work, but were not tested by dSPACE.
■ One PC Card adapter (to be a synonym for PCMCIA-adapter) for
CompactFlash cards to be inserted in the PC card reader installed
in the expansion box.
Software provided by
The AutoBoot package contains the following software components:
the AutoBoot package
■ Loader software to load an application to the dSPACE system. The
following dSPACE systems are currently supported by Autoboot
Option: DS1103, DS1005.
■ A template file (autoboot.bat) to be copied to the
CompactFlash card. This file is required by the slot CPU installed in
the expansion box.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
145
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Using the AutoBoot Option ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Installation Requirements
The following requirements apply if you want to use Autoboot Option:
Hardware requirements
■ Autoboot Option requires an expansion box (for example an
AutoBox) connected to the host PC via Ethernet. The slot CPU in
the expansion box contains firmware to support the different
dSPACE systems. The slot CPU currently supports the following
boards: DS1103, DS1005.
■ Your host PC has to support the reading and writing of
CompactFlash cards.
•
If your host PC has a PC Card socket, you can use the
PC Card adapter to access the CompactFlash card.
•
N
Software requirements
Otherwise, you can use a common USB CompactFlash card
reader.
AutoBoot option for expansion boxes does not work with
multiconnect groups.
For details on the software required on your host PC, refer to
Additional System Requirements and Recommendations in the dSPACE
Software Installation and Management Guide.
146
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Using the AutoBoot Option
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Install the AutoBoot
Hardware in the Expansion Box
Before you can use AutoBoot Option, you have to install the PC card
reader in the expansion box.
C
WARNING! Hazardous voltages.
Risk of electric shock and/or damage to the hardware.
■ Before you install the PC card reader:
•
Turn off the host PC and the expansion box.
•
Disconnect the host PC and the expansion box from the power
supplies.
■ Do not connect any devices while installing the PC card reader.
To install the PC card reader in an expansion box
1
Familiarize yourself with the information provided in Safety
Precautions for Using Expansion Boxes on page 22.
2
Make sure that the boot ROM of the PC card reader is disabled.
You can disable the boot ROM by shorting pins 1 and 2, and pins 3
and 4 via jumpers on the PC card reader.
2
4
1
3
Jumpers (JP3)
For further instructions, refer to the PC Card Reader User’s Manual.
3
Remove the cover of the expansion box.
4
Insert the PC card reader into an empty slot, and fix it to the
mounting bracket with the screw.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
147
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Using the AutoBoot Option ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
5
148
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Close the cover of the expansion box.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Using the AutoBoot Option
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
How to Format the
CompactFlash Card
The CompactFlash card must now be formatted for use in the
expansion box.
N
■ The following steps are necessary only once for a new
CompactFlash card.
■ If your host PC runs Windows XP, do not format the
CompactFlash card on this system. For further instructions on how
to work with CompactFlash cards under Windows XP, refer to:
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Readme\AutoBoot.TXT
To format the CompactFlash card under Windows 2000
1
Start Windows 2000.
2
Insert the CompactFlash card in the CompactFlash card reader of
the host PC.
N
It is assumed that the CompactFlash card reader emulates drive d:
in the host PC.
3
N
Open Windows Explorer and right-click drive d:, then select
Format … .
•
You have to set the file system. Select FAT.
•
Click Start to format the CompactFlash card.
The drive to be formatted and the current working drive – selected
in Windows Explorer – must not be the same.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
149
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Using the AutoBoot Option ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Autoboot an
Application
After you formatted the CompactFlash card successfully, your
expansion box is ready to autoboot an application.
To autoboot an application
1
Insert the CompactFlash card in the CompactFlash card reader of
the host PC.
2
Copy the following files to the root directory of the
CompactFlash card:
N
•
%DSPACE_ROOT%\AbxBoot\autoboot.bat
•
The object file of your application
If the file name of your application does not comply with the
DOS 8.3 naming convention, follow the instructions in How to
Handle AutoBoot Applications with Long File Names on page 154.
T
The %DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\AbxBoot\Host folder contains
the demo application smd_1103_ab for your specific system. Since
this application does not comply with the DOS 8.3 naming
convention, you have to copy the smd1103a object file and the
smd1103a.lft file to the root directory of your CompactFlash card.
Both files are located in the directory
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\AbxBoot\Card folder.
3
Open the file %DSPACE_ROOT%\AbxBoot\autoboot.bat, and insert
the following line:
ld1103ab <name_of_application> /b ds1103
150
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
N
Using the AutoBoot Option
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The program loader ld1103ab assumes 300H as the board’s I/O
base address by default. If you changed this address, specify the
modified address as a command line option in the autoboot.bat
file, for example,
ld1103ab smd1103a /b ds1103 /p 0x320
4
E
Save the changes of the autoboot.bat file to the
CompactFlash card.
Suppose you want to autoboot the demo application
%DSPACE_ROOT%\Demos\DS1103\AbxBoot\Host\smd1103_ab.ppc on
the respective board installed in your expansion box. The
autoboot.bat of the CompactFlash card should now read as
follows:
ld1103ab smd1103a /b ds1103 /p 0x300
During the boot process
5
Remove the CompactFlash card from the host PC.
6
Insert CompactFlash card with the aid of the PC Card adapter in
the PC card reader of the expansion box.
7
Turn on the expansion box.
With the CompactFlash card inserted in the PC card reader of the
expansion box, the following steps will be performed during the boot
process:
1. config.sys from the on-board-flash memory of slot CPU in the
expansion box loads driver and configuration files.
2. autoexec.bat from the on-board-flash memory of the slot CPU
card in the expansion box calls up the autoboot.bat from the
CompactFlash card.
3. autoboot.bat starts your application.
T
■ You can connect the host PC to the expansion box when the
autoboot application is running: see How to Connect the PC to the
Expansion Box when the Autoboot Application is Running on
page 153.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
151
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Using the AutoBoot Option ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
■ If the expansion box does not boot properly, see Problems with
AutoBoot Option on page 248.
152
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Using the AutoBoot Option
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Further Information on Using
AutoBoot Option
This section provides some general instructions on Autoboot Option.
For detailed information, see:
■ How to Connect the PC to the Expansion Box when the Autoboot
Application is Running on page 153
■ How to Load Slave Applications on page 153
■ How to Handle AutoBoot Applications with Long File Names on
page 154
How to Connect the PC to the Expansion
Box when the Autoboot Application is
Running
You can connect your host PC to the expansion box and run
ControlDesk after the application is autobooted without having to
restart or interrupt the application.
To connect the host PC to the expansion box and run
ControlDesk after the application is autobooted
1
From ControlDesk’s menu bar, choose Platform – Change
Connection. Enter the IP address of your expansion box.
ControlDesk connects to the expansion box and automatically
detects that an application is running.
2
In ControlDesk’s Insert Directory for AutoBoot Option dialog,
specify the AutoBoot directory on the host PC containing the
application.
How to Load Slave Applications
N
You cannot load a slave application to the slave DSP of the DS1103.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
153
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Using the AutoBoot Option ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Handle AutoBoot Applications
with Long File Names
Since DOS is running on the slot CPU card in the expansion box, the
file names used on the slot CPU must comply with the DOS 8.3
naming convention (up to eight characters followed by a period and
an extension of up to three characters).
The following instructions apply if you want to autoboot an
application with a file name that does not comply with this
convention.
To handle applications with long file names for Autoboot
Option
1
Copy the application (with the long file name) to the root directory
of the CompactFlash card.
2
Rename the application according to the DOS 8.3 naming
convention.
N
Do not change the name of the application located on the
host PC!
3
Use a text editor to create the corresponding Long Filename
Transcription (LFT) file in the root directory of the
CompactFlash card. In this file, enter the original long file name
(including the file name extension). The LFT file is read by the
program loader, which registers the application's long file name
with the device driver.
E
154
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Suppose the application’s original name is ApplicationLong.ppc.
Rename it to AppShort.ppc, and create the AppShort.lft file. In this
file, enter ApplicationLong.ppc.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Uninstalling the System
All components of a dSPACE system, software and hardware, can be
removed from in the following order:
1. You have to remove the software first. For further information,
refer to Removing dSPACE Software in the dSPACE Software
Installation and Management Guide.
2. Afterwards you can remove the hardware. Refer to How to
Remove the Hardware on page 156.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
155
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Uninstalling the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
How to Remove the Hardware
The boards to be removed from your host PC depend on the
installation of the DS1103 PPC Controller Board:
■ If the DS1103 is installed in the host PC, the dSPACE board must
be removed from the host PC.
■ If the DS1103 is installed in an expansion box connected to the
host PC via a bus interface, the link boards (DS813/DS817) must
be removed. The DS815 can simply be ejected from the host PC.
■ DS1103 is installed in an expansion box connected to the host PC
via Ethernet, only the network cable of the expansion box needs
to be disconnected from the PC or the local area network.
Preconditions
■ The system is switched off. For instructions, refer to How to Switch
Off a dSPACE System on page 39.
■ Precautions are taken to avoid damage by high electrostatic
voltages. For details, refer to Safety Precautions for Installing and
Connecting the Hardware on page 20.
Method
C
To remove dSPACE boards
WARNING! Hazardous voltages.
Risk of electric shock and/or damage to the hardware.
Before removing any board, make sure that:
■ The power supply of the host PC and/or the expansion box are
switched off.
■ No external device is connected to the dSPACE system.
1
Disconnect the host PC, the expansion box and all external devices
connected to them from the power supply.
156
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
2
Unplug any external devices or connector panels from the I/O
connectors of the DS1103.
3
Open the enclosure.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
C
Uninstalling the System
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
CAUTION! Improper handling will damage the fan of the board.
■ Do not touch any components of the fan, neither during operation
nor when it has stopped.
■ Do not apply pressure to the fan bearing during installation and
removal of the board.
4
Unscrew the triple bracket of the DS1103 or the bracket of the link
board (PC).
5
Remove the DS1103 and/or the link board (PC) from the slot.
6
Reinstall the original bracket(s) to cover the opening(s) at the rear
side of the enclosure.
7
Close the enclosure, reconnect the PC to the power supply, and
turn it on.
The host PC should boot as usual.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
157
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Uninstalling the System ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
158
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Connector Pinouts and
LEDs
This chapter provides hardware-related, reference information on the
elements of the DS1103 and its optional accessories, the CP1103
Connector Panel and the CLP1103 Connector/LED Combi Panel:
■ Board Overview on page 161 contains an illustration of the board,
showing the location of connectors, jumpers and LEDs.
■ DS1103 Connectors on page 163 shows the pin assignments of
the different board connectors.
■ CP1103/CLP1103 Connectors on page 178 shows the front view of
the connector panel and the pin assignments of the connectors
equipped on the panel.
■ CLP1103 LED Assignment on page 191 shows the LED array of the
CLP.
Mapping of I/O signals
Various connector pins can be assigned to RTI blocks and RTLib
functions. Refer to Mapping of I/O Signals on page 195.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
159
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
AutoBox pinouts
The DS1103 can be installed in an AutoBox. For details on the pinouts
of the AutoBox, see Installing AutoBox in a Vehicle on page 47.
160
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Board Overview
The illustration shows the locations of the connectors, jumpers and
LEDs on the DS1103. It is not to scale.
JTAG programming connector (P5)
Status LEDs
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3
1
(P3)
(P1)
(P2)
1
1
Slave DSP debug
connector (P6)
Slave DSP
flash jumpers (J1)
Bracket
Digital connector (P2)
P3
Incremental encoder/
digital connector (P3)
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
P2
P1
Analog
connector (P1)
March 2004
161
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
These are the most important connectors:
■ The analog connector (P1) is a 100-pin connector. The signals
available at this connector are described in Analog Connector (P1)
on page 164.
■ The digital connector (P2) is a 100-pin connector. The signals
available at this connector are described in Digital Connector (P2)
on page 168.
■ The incremental encoder/digital connector (P3) is a 100-pin
connector. The signals available at this connector are described in
Incremental Encoder/Digital Connector (P3) on page 172.
Furthermore, the following connectors, jumpers and LEDs can be
found on the DS1103 board:
■ The JTAG programming connector (P5) is for internal use only.
C
To avoid damage, do not touch the JTAG programming
connector when power is applied to the DS1103.
■ The slave DSP flash jumper (J1) is used to control the protection
mode and watchdog mode of the flash memory (see Slave DSP
Flash Jumper (J1) on page 177).
■ The slave DSP debug connector (P6) can be used for Slave DSP
debugging. The signals available at this connector are described in
Slave DSP Debug Connector (P6) on page 176.
■ The 4 red status LEDs display the current status of the board.
These LEDs can be used for troubleshooting purposes. For details,
see Status LEDs of the DS1103 on page 192.
162
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
DS1103 Connectors
The DS1103 is equipped with the following connectors:
■ Analog Connector (P1) on page 164
■ Digital Connector (P2) on page 168
■ Incremental Encoder/Digital Connector (P3) on page 172
■ Slave DSP Debug Connector (P6) on page 176
■ Slave DSP Flash Jumper (J1) on page 177
N
Prior to connecting external devices to the board, ensure you have
familiarized yourself with the relevant instructions provided in How to
N
The DS1103 provides three VCC lines. The total load of every VCC line
(VCC1, VCC2 or VCC3) must not exceed 500 mA.
Connect External Devices to a Board on page 138.
Every VCC line (VCC1 … VCC3) is protected against short circuits by
one multifuse on the DS1103.
If VCC is overloaded or shorted, the corresponding multifuse is heated
up by the overcurrent and abruptly raises its resistance. To reset the
multifuse to its initial low resistance, turn off the power for some
minutes to allow the multifuse to cool down.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
163
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Analog Connector (P1)
The analog connector (P1) is a 100-pin, high density KEL connector. It
is used to obtain access to the analog signals of the board. The
connector is located on the bracket of the DS1103, see Board
Overview on page 161.
Adapter cable
Using the adapter cable supplied with the board, the analog connector
(P1) can be linked to two 50-pin, female Sub-D connectors (labeled
P1A, P1B).
Pinout of analog
connector (P1)
The following table shows the pin assignment of the analog connector
(P1). It also provides the mapping to the Sub-D connectors of the
adapter cable.
164
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector (P1)
1
99
2
100
Pin
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
Sub-D Pin
Signal
Pin
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
P1B
GND
ADCH1
GND
ADCH3
GND
ADCH5
GND
ADCH7
GND
ADCH9
GND
ADCH11
GND
ADCH13
GND
ADCH15
GND
ADCH17
GND
ADCH19
GND
GND
GND
DACH1
GND
DACH3
GND
DACH5
GND
DACH7
GND
GND
GND
SADCH1
GND
SADCH3
GND
SADCH5
GND
SADCH7
GND
SADCH9
GND
SADCH11
GND
SADCH13
GND
SADCH15
GND
SADCSOC
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
1
34
18
2
35
19
3
36
20
4
37
21
5
38
22
6
39
23
7
40
24
8
41
25
9
42
26
10
43
27
11
44
28
12
45
29
13
46
30
14
47
31
15
48
32
16
49
33
17
50
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
Sub-D Pin
Signal
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
P1A
GND
ADCH2
GND
ADCH4
GND
ADCH6
GND
ADCH8
GND
ADCH10
GND
ADCH12
GND
ADCH14
GND
ADCH16
GND
ADCH18
GND
ADCH20
GND
GND
GND
DACH2
GND
DACH4
GND
DACH6
GND
DACH8
GND
GND
GND
SADCH2
GND
SADCH4
GND
SADCH6
GND
SADCH8
GND
SADCH10
GND
SADCH12
GND
SADCH14
GND
SADCH16
GND
GND
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
1
34
18
2
35
19
3
36
20
4
37
21
5
38
22
6
39
23
7
40
24
8
41
25
9
42
26
10
43
27
11
44
28
12
45
29
13
46
30
14
47
31
15
48
32
16
49
33
17
50
March 2004
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
165
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Pinout of
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
Sub-D connectors
standardized, the following illustrations show the numbering used
(viewed from the top of a female connector).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
The table below shows the pin assignment of the Sub-D connector
P1A.
Connector P1A
18
34
1
17
50
33
166
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Pin
Signal
1
GND
2
ADCH4
3
4
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
34
ADCH2
35
GND
18
GND
GND
19
ADCH6
36
ADCH8
ADCH10
20
GND
37
GND
5
GND
21
ADCH12
38
ADCH14
6
ADCH16
22
GND
39
GND
7
GND
23
ADCH18
40
ADCH20
8
GND
24
GND
41
GND
9
GND
25
DACH2
42
DACH4
10
DACH6
26
GND
43
GND
11
GND
27
DACH8
44
GND
12
SADCH2
28
GND
45
GND
13
GND
29
SADCH4
46
SADCH6
14
SADCH8
30
GND
47
GND
15
GND
31
SADCH10
48
SADCH12
16
SADCH14
32
GND
49
GND
17
GND
33
SADCH16
50
GND
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The table below shows the pin assignment of the Sub-D connector
P1B.
Connector P1B
18
34
1
17
50
33
Pin
Signal
1
GND
2
ADCH3
3
GND
4
ADCH9
5
GND
6
ADCH15
7
GND
8
GND
9
GND
10
DACH5
Pin
Pin
Signal
34
ADCH1
GND
35
GND
19
ADCH5
36
ADCH7
20
GND
37
GND
21
ADCH11
38
ADCH13
22
GND
39
GND
23
ADCH17
40
ADCH19
24
GND
41
GND
25
DACH1
42
DACH3
26
GND
43
GND
18
Signal
11
GND
27
DACH7
44
GND
12
SADCH1
28
GND
45
GND
13
GND
29
SADCH3
46
SADCH5
14
SADCH7
30
GND
47
GND
15
GND
31
SADCH9
48
SADCH11
16
SADCH13
32
GND
49
GND
17
GND
33
SADCH15
50
SADCSOC
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
167
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Digital Connector (P2)
The digital connector (P2) is a 100-pin, high density KEL connector. It is
used to obtain access to the digital signals of the board. The connector
is located on the bracket of the DS1103, see Board Overview on
page 161.
Adapter cable
Using the adapter cable supplied with the board, the digital connector
(P2) can be linked to two 50-pin, female Sub-D connectors (labeled
P2A, P2B).
Pinout of digital
connector (P2)
The following table shows the pin assignment of the digital connector
(P2). It also provides the mapping to the Sub-D connectors of the
adapter cable.
168
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector (P2)
1
99
2
100
Pin
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
Sub-D Pin
Signal
Pin
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
P2B
GND
GND
IO0
IO2
GND
IO4
IO6
GND
IO8
IO10
GND
IO12
IO14
GND
IO16
IO18
GND
IO20
IO22
GND
IO24
IO26
GND
IO28
IO30
GND
STINT1
STMRDIR
GND
ST1PWM
ST3PWM
GND
SPWM1
SPWM3
SPWM5
SPWM7
SPWM9
GND
SCAP1
SCAP3
GND
SXF
SCLK
SSIMO
GND
INT0
INT2
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
GND
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
P2
1
34
18
2
35
19
3
36
20
4
37
21
5
38
22
6
39
23
7
40
24
8
41
25
9
42
26
10
43
27
11
44
28
12
45
29
13
46
30
14
47
31
15
48
32
16
49
33
17
50
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
Sub-D Pin
Signal
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
P2A
GND
GND
IO1
IO3
GND
IO5
IO7
GND
IO9
IO11
GND
IO13
IO15
GND
IO17
IO19
GND
IO21
IO23
GND
IO25
IO27
GND
IO29
IO31
GND
STINT2
STMRCLK
GND
ST2PWM
SPDPINT
GND
SPWM2
SPWM4
SPWM6
SPWM8
GND
GND
SCAP2
SCAP4
GND
SBIO
SSTE
SSOMI
GND
INT1
INT3
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
GND
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
1
34
18
2
35
19
3
36
20
4
37
21
5
38
22
6
39
23
7
40
24
8
41
25
9
42
26
10
43
27
11
44
28
12
45
29
13
46
30
14
47
31
15
48
32
16
49
33
17
50
March 2004
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
169
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Pinout of
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
Sub-D connectors
standardized, the following illustrations show the numbering used
(viewed from the top of a female connector).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
The table below shows the pin assignment of the Sub-D connector
P2A.
Connector P2A
18
34
1
17
50
33
170
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
GND
2
IO3
18
3
IO7
4
IO11
5
Signal
Pin
Signal
34
GND
IO1
35
GND
19
IO5
36
GND
20
IO9
37
GND
IO15
21
IO13
38
GND
6
IO19
22
IO17
39
GND
7
IO23
23
IO21
40
GND
8
IO27
24
IO25
41
GND
9
IO31
25
IO29
42
GND
10
STMRCLK
26
STINT2
43
GND
11
SPDPINT
27
ST2PWM
44
GND
12
SPWM4
28
SPWM2
45
SPWM6
13
GND
29
SPWM8
46
GND
14
SCAP4
30
SCAP2
47
GND
15
SSTE
31
SBIO
48
SSOMI
16
INT1
32
GND
49
INT3
17
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
33
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
50
GND
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The table below shows the pin assignment of the Sub-D connector
P2B.
Connector P2B
18
34
1
17
50
33
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
GND
2
IO2
18
3
IO6
4
IO10
5
Signal
Pin
Signal
34
GND
IO0
35
GND
19
IO4
36
GND
20
IO8
37
GND
IO14
21
IO12
38
GND
6
IO18
22
IO16
39
GND
7
IO22
23
IO20
40
GND
8
IO26
24
IO24
41
GND
9
IO30
25
IO28
42
GND
10
STMRDIR
26
STINT1
43
GND
11
ST3PWM
27
ST1PWM
44
GND
12
SPWM3
28
SPWM1
45
SPWM5
13
SPWM9
29
SPWM7
46
GND
14
SCAP3
30
SCAP1
47
GND
15
SCLK
31
SXF
48
SSIMO
16
INT0
32
GND
49
INT2
17
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
33
VCC1 (+ 5 V)
50
GND
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
171
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Incremental Encoder/Digital
Connector (P3)
The incremental encoder/digital connector (P3) is a 100-pin, high
density KEL connector. It is used to obtain access to the signals of the
incremental encoder channels. The connector is located on the bracket
of the DS1103, see Board Overview on page 161.
Adapter cable
Using the adapter cable supplied with the board, the incremental
encoder/digital connector (P3) can be linked to two 50-pin, female
Sub-D connectors (labeled P3A, P3B).
Pinout of connector (P3)
The following table shows the pin assignment of the incremental
encoder/digital connector (P3). It also provides the mapping to the
Sub-D connectors of the adapter cable.
Signal names in parentheses apply when the UART is set to the RS422
mode.
172
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector (P3)
1
99
2
100
Pin
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
Sub-D Pin
Signal
Pin
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
P3B
GND
TXD (TXD)
RXD (RXD)
RTS (RTS)
CTS (CTS)
RI (not used for RS422)
STXD
SRXD
–
–
–
–
–
GND
PHI0(7)
PHI90(7)
IDX(7)
GND
PHI0(6)
PHI90(6)
IDX(6)
GND
PHI0(1)
PHI90(1)
IDX(1)
GND
PHI0(2)
PHI90(2)
IDX(2)
GND
PHI0(3)
PHI90(3)
IDX(3)
GND
PHI0(4)
PHI90(4)
IDX(4)
GND
PHI0(5)
PHI90(5)
IDX(5)
GND
CANL
CANH
GND
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
GND
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
P3
1
34
18
2
35
19
3
36
20
4
37
21
5
38
22
6
39
23
7
40
24
8
41
25
9
42
26
10
43
27
11
44
28
12
45
29
13
46
30
14
47
31
15
48
32
16
49
33
17
50
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
Sub-D Pin
Signal
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
P3A
GND
Not used for RS232 (TXD)
DCD (RXD)
DTR (RTS)
DSR (CTS)
GND
STXD
SRXD
–
–
–
–
–
GND
PHI0(7)
PHI90(7)
IDX(7)
GND
PHI0(6)
PHI90(6)
IDX(6)
GND
PHI0(1)
PHI90(1)
IDX(1)
GND
PHI0(2)
PHI90(2)
IDX(2)
GND
PHI0(3)
PHI90(3)
IDX(3)
GND
PHI0(4)
PHI90(4)
IDX(4)
GND
PHI0(5)
PHI90(5)
IDX(5)
GND
GND
GND
GND
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
GND
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
1
34
18
2
35
19
3
36
20
4
37
21
5
38
22
6
39
23
7
40
24
8
41
25
9
42
26
10
43
27
11
44
28
12
45
29
13
46
30
14
47
31
15
48
32
16
49
33
17
50
March 2004
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
173
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
N
The CAN bus lines (CANH, CANL) are not terminated with a resistor on
the DS1103.
Pinout of
Sub-D connectors
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following illustrations show the numbering used
(viewed from the top of a female connector).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
The table below shows the pin assignment of the Sub-D connector
P3A. Signal names in parentheses apply when the UART is set to the
RS422 mode.
Connector P3A
18
34
1
17
50
33
174
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
GND
2
DTR (RTS)
18
3
STXD
4
–
5
–
6
PHI90(7)
7
PHI0(6)
8
Signal
Pin
Signal
34
Not used for
RS232 (TXD)
DCD (RXD)
35
DSR (CTS)
19
GND
36
SRXD
20
–
37
–
21
–
38
GND
22
PHI0(7)
39
IDX(7)
23
GND
40
PHI90(6)
GND
24
IDX(6)
41
PHI0(1)
9
IDX(1)
25
PHI90(1)
42
GND
10
PHI90(2)
26
PHI0(2)
43
IDX(2)
11
PHI0(3)
27
GND
44
PHI90(3)
12
GND
28
IDX(3)
45
PHI0(4)
13
IDX(4)
29
PHI90(4)
46
GND
14
PHI90(5)
30
PHI0(5)
47
IDX(5)
15
GND
31
GND
48
GND
16
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
32
GND
49
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
17
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
33
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
50
GND
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The table below shows the pin assignment of the Sub-D connector
P3B. Signal names in parentheses apply when the UART is set to the
RS422 mode.
Connector P3B
18
34
1
17
50
33
N
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
1
GND
2
Signal
34
TXD (TXD)
RTS (RTS)
18
RXD (RXD)
35
CTS (CTS)
3
STXD
19
RI (not used
for RS422)
36
SRXD
4
–
20
–
37
–
5
–
21
–
38
GND
6
PHI90(7)
22
PHI0(7)
39
IDX(7)
7
PHI0(6)
23
GND
40
PHI90(6)
8
GND
24
IDX(6)
41
PHI0(1)
9
IDX(1)
25
PHI90(1)
42
GND
10
PHI90(2)
26
PHI0(2)
43
IDX(2)
11
PHI0(3)
27
GND
44
PHI90(3)
12
GND
28
IDX(3)
45
PHI0(4)
13
IDX(4)
29
PHI90(4)
46
GND
14
PHI90(5)
30
PHI0(5)
47
IDX(5)
15
CANL
31
GND
48
CANH
16
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
32
GND
49
VCC2 (+ 5 V)
17
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
33
VCC3 (+ 5 V)
50
GND
The CAN bus lines (CANH, CANL) are not terminated with a resistor on
the DS1103.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
175
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Slave DSP Debug Connector (P6)
The TMS320F240 slave DSP features a superset of the IEEE 1149.1
JTAG standard emulation port. This emulation port can be used for
software debugging. The DS1103 contains a JTAG connector to
connect an external emulator such as the Texas Instruments XDS510.
For the location of the connector on the board, see Board Overview on
page 161.
Connector
1
13
N
176
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
2
14
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
TMS
2
TRST
3
TDI
4
GND
5
VCC
6
7
TDO
8
GND
9
TCK
10
GND
11
TCK
12
GND
13
EMU0
14
EMU1
The dSPACE software does not support the slave DSP debug
connector.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Slave DSP Flash Jumper (J1)
The slave DSP contains an on-chip flash memory. The flash jumper (see
Board Overview on page 161) is used to set the protection mode of
the flash memory and the slave DSP watchdog mode.
The VCCp pin of the TMS320F240 slave DSP selects the protection
mode of the flash memory and the slave DSP watchdog mode:
■ If the jumper connects VCCp to VCC (default setting):
•
erase/write operations to the flash memory are enabled
•
the watchdog is disabled
■ If the jumper connects VCCp to GND:
N
•
erase/write operations to the flash memory are disabled
•
the watchdog is enabled
1
2
3
GND
VCCp
VCC
The dSPACE software does not support the watchdog of the slave DSP.
For this reason, do not change the jumper’s default setting shown
above.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
177
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
CP1103/CLP1103 Connectors
The connector panels CP1103 and CLP1103 provide easy-to-use
connections between the DS1103 and devices to be connected to it.
Devices can be individually connected, disconnected or interchanged
without soldering. This simplifies system construction, testing and
troubleshooting.
N
Prior to connecting external devices to the connector panel, ensure
you have familiarized yourself with the relevant instructions provided
in How to Connect External Devices to a Connector Panel on
page 140.
C
WARNING! Hazardous voltages.
Risk of electric shock and/or damage to the hardware.
■ Do not connect any high-voltage devices to the I/O connectors of
the panel.
Template clip
CP1
CP5
CP9
CP13
CP17
CP21
CP25
CP2
CP6
CP10
CP14
CP18
CP22
CP26
CP3
CP7
CP11
CP15
CP19
CP23
CP27
CP4
CP8
CP12
CP16
CP20
CP24
CP28
CP29
CP30
CP32
CP34
CP36
CP38
CP40
CP42
CP33
CP35
CP37
CP39
CP41
CP43
CP31
BNC connectors
178
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
N
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
All VCC1, VCC2 and VCC3 lines of the DS1103 are connected on the
CP1103/CLP1103 and called VCC. The total load of all connector pins
that provide access to the PC power supply must not exceed 1.5 A
(CP1103) or 0.75 A (CLP1103).
The VCC lines are protected against short circuits by the multifuses on
the DS1103.
If VCC is overloaded or shorted, the multifuses on the DS1103 are
heated up by the overcurrent and abruptly raise their resistance. To
reset the multifuses to their initial low resistance, turn off the power
for some minutes to allow the multifuses to cool down.
The CP1103 and CLP1103 Connector Panels are equipped with the
following connectors:
■ BNC Connectors (CP1 ... CP28) on page 180
■ Slave ADC Connector (CP29) on page 181
■ Digital I/O Connector (CP30) on page 182
■ Slave I/O Connector (CP31) on page 183
■ Incremental Encoder Interface Connectors (CP32 ... CP37, CP39)
on page 185
■ CAN Connector (CP38) on page 186
■ Master PPC UART RS232 Connector (CP40) on page 187
■ Slave DSP UART RS232 Connector (CP41) on page 188
■ Master PPC UART RS422 Connector (CP42) on page 189
■ Slave DSP UART RS422 Connector (CP43) on page 190
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
179
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
BNC Connectors (CP1 ... CP28)
The CP1 ... CP28 connectors are female BNC connectors. Their shells
are connected to GND.
N
180
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector
Signal
Connector
Signal
CP1
ADCH1
CP15
ADCH15
CP2
ADCH2
CP16
ADCH16
CP3
ADCH3
CP17
ADCH17
CP4
ADCH4
CP18
ADCH18
CP5
ADCH5
CP19
ADCH19
CP6
ADCH6
CP20
ADCH20
CP7
ADCH7
CP21
DACH1
CP8
ADCH8
CP22
DACH2
CP9
ADCH9
CP23
DACH3
CP10
ADCH10
CP24
DACH4
CP11
ADCH11
CP25
DACH5
CP12
ADCH12
CP26
DACH6
CP13
ADCH13
CP27
DACH7
CP14
ADCH14
CP28
DACH8
In order to avoid poor performance of the analog subsystems, do not
form ground loops within the BNC wiring.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Slave ADC Connector (CP29)
The slave ADC connector (CP29) is a 37-pin, male Sub-D connector
located on the front of the connector panel.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
181
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Slave ADC
Connector (CP29)
Pin
19
19
GND
18
1
37
20
Signal
Pin
Signal
GND
37
SADCSOC
17
GND
36
GND
16
GND
35
SADCH16
15
GND
34
SADCH15
14
GND
33
SADCH14
13
GND
32
SADCH13
12
GND
31
SADCH12
11
GND
30
SADCH11
10
GND
29
SADCH10
9
GND
28
SADCH9
8
GND
27
SADCH8
7
GND
26
SADCH7
6
GND
25
SADCH6
5
GND
24
SADCH5
4
GND
23
SADCH4
3
GND
22
SADCH3
2
GND
21
SADCH2
1
GND
20
SADCH1
Digital I/O Connector (CP30)
The digital I/O connector (CP30) is a 50-pin male, Sub-D connector
located on the front of the connector panel.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
182
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
C
Digital I/O
Connector (CP30)
33
17
50
1
34
18
N
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin
17
GND
16
Signal
50
VCC (+5 V)
IO30
33
IO31
49
INT3
15
IO28
32
IO29
48
INT2
14
IO26
31
IO27
47
INT1
13
IO24
30
IO25
46
INT0
12
IO22
29
IO23
45
GND
11
IO20
28
IO21
44
GND
10
IO18
27
IO19
43
GND
9
IO16
26
IO17
42
GND
8
IO14
25
IO15
41
GND
7
IO12
24
IO13
40
GND
6
IO10
23
IO11
39
GND
5
IO8
22
IO9
38
GND
4
IO6
21
IO7
37
GND
3
IO4
20
IO5
36
GND
2
IO2
19
IO3
35
GND
1
IO0
18
IO1
34
GND
All VCC1, VCC2 and VCC3 lines of the DS1103 are connected on the
CP1103/CLP1103 and called VCC. The total load of all connector pins
that provide access to the PC power supply must not exceed 1.5 A
(CP1103) or 0.75 A (CLP1103).
Slave I/O Connector (CP31)
The slave I/O connector (CP31) is a 37-pin, female Sub-D connector
located on the front of the connector panel.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
183
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Slave I/O
Connector (CP31)
1
19
N
20
37
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
GND
2
SCAP1
20
GND
3
SCAP3
21
SCAP2
4
GND
22
SCAP4
5
ST2PWM
23
ST1PWM
6
GND
24
ST3PWM
7
SPWM1
25
GND
8
SPWM3
26
SPWM2
9
SPWM5
27
SPWM4
10
SPWM7
28
SPWM6
11
SPWM9
29
SPWM8
12
STMRCLK
30
GND
13
GND
31
STMRDIR
14
STINT1
32
SPDPINT
15
GND
33
STINT2
16
SSIMO
34
SSOMI
17
SCLK
35
SSTE
18
SXF
36
SBIO
19
VCC (+5 V)
37
GND
All VCC1, VCC2 and VCC3 lines of the DS1103 are connected on the
CP1103/CLP1103 and called VCC. The total load of all connector pins
that provide access to the PC power supply must not exceed 1.5 A
(CP1103) or 0.75 A (CLP1103).
184
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Incremental Encoder Interface
Connectors (CP32 ... CP37, CP39)
The incremental encoder interface connectors (CP32 ... CP37 and
CP39) are 15-pin, female Sub-D connectors located on the front of the
connector panel. Each of the connectors provides the signals for one
of the seven available incremental encoder channels.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Connector
(CP32 … CP37,
CP39)
1
8
9
15
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
VCC (+5 V)
2
PHI0(x)
9
VCC (+5 V)
3
PHI0(x)
10
GND
4
PHI90(x)
11
GND
5
PHI90(x)
12
GND
6
INDEX(x)
13
GND
7
INDEX(x)
14
GND
8
GND
15
GND
x corresponds to the seven available incremental encoder channels:
The channels 1 ... 7 correspond to the connectors CP32 ... CP37 and
CP39.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
185
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
N
All VCC1, VCC2 and VCC3 lines of the DS1103 are connected on the
CP1103/CLP1103 and called VCC. The total load of all connector pins
that provide access to the PC power supply must not exceed 1.5 A
(CP1103) or 0.75 A (CLP1103).
N
If the encoder has SENSE lines, connect SENSE+ to VCC (Pin 9) and
SENSE– to GND (Pin 15).
CAN Connector (CP38)
The CAN connector (CP38) is a 9-pin, male Sub-D connector located
on the front of the connector panel. The pinout has been adopted
from the standard, 9-pin CAN connector.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
CAN Connector
(CP38)
5
1
N
186
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
9
6
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
5
GND
4
3
Not used
9
Not used
GND
8
Not used
2
CANL
7
CANH
1
Not used
6
GND
The CAN bus lines (CANH, CANL) are not terminated with a resistor on
the DS1103.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Master PPC UART RS232 Connector
(CP40)
The master PPC UART RS232 connector (CP40) is a 9-pin, male Sub-D
connector located on the front of the connector panel. The pinout has
been adopted from the 9-pin, RS232 connector of a PC.
N
The master PPC of the DS1103 supports one serial interface. In
RS232 mode the signals are available from the master PPC UART
RS232 connector (CP40). In RS422 mode the signals are available from
the master PPC UART RS422 connector (CP42). CP40 and CP42 are
mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Connector (CP40)
5
1
9
6
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
5
GND
4
DTR (RTS)
9
RI
3
TXD
8
CTS
2
RXD
7
RTS
1
DCD (RXD)
6
DSR (CTS)
Signal names in parentheses apply when the UART is set to the RS422
mode. However, you should use the Master PPC UART RS422
Connector (CP42) instead, when you are using RS422 mode.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
187
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Slave DSP UART RS232 Connector (CP41)
The slave DSP UART RS232 connector (CP41) is a 9-pin male Sub-D
connector located on the front of the connector panel. The pinout has
been adopted from the 9-pin RS232 connector of a PC.
N
The slave DSP of the DS1103 supports one serial communication
interface. In RS232 mode the signals are available from the slave DSP
UART RS232 connector (CP41). In RS422 mode the signals are
available from the slave DSP UART RS422 connector (CP43). CP41 and
CP43 are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Connector (CP41)
5
1
188
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
9
6
Pin
Signal
5
GND
4
Not used
3
STXD
8
Not used
2
SRXD
7
Not used
1
Not used
6
Not used
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
Pin
Signal
9
Not used
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Master PPC UART RS422 Connector
(CP42)
The master PPC UART RS422 connector (CP42) is a 9-pin male Sub-D
connector located on the front of the connector panel.
N
The master PPC of the DS1103 supports one serial interface. In
RS232 mode the signals are available from the master PPC UART
RS232 connector (CP40). In RS422 mode the signals are available from
the master PPC UART RS422 connector (CP42). CP40 and CP42 are
mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Connector (CP42)
5
1
9
6
Pin
Signal
5
GND
4
RXD
3
RXD
8
CTS
2
TXD
7
RTS
1
TXD
6
RTS
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
Pin
Signal
9
CTS
March 2004
189
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Slave DSP UART RS422 Connector (CP43)
The slave DSP UART RS422 connector (CP43) is a 9-pin male Sub-D
connector located on the front of the connector panel.
N
The slave DSP of the DS1103 supports one serial communication
interface. In RS232 mode the signals are available from the slave DSP
UART RS232 connector (CP41). In RS422 mode the signals are
available from the slave DSP UART RS422 connector (CP43). CP41 and
CP43 are mutually exclusive and cannot be used at the same time.
Pinout
Because the pin numbering used for Sub-D connectors is not
standardized, the following figure shows the numbering scheme used
(front view).
C
Do not rely on the numbers written on Sub-D connectors.
Connector (CP43)
5
1
190
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
9
6
Pin
Signal
5
GND
4
SRXD
9
Not used
3
SRXD
8
Not used
2
STXD
7
Not used
1
STXD
6
Not used
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
Pin
March 2004
Signal
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
CLP1103 LED Assignment
The CLP1103 Connector/LED Combi Panel additionally provides an
array of 92 LEDs indicating the states of the digital signals.
In the illustration below you will find the signal names as labeled on
the panel template.
Holes for
19" rack mount
IO0
IO16
SPWM1
INT0
TXD
IO1
IO17
SPWM2
INT1
RXD
IO2
IO18
SPWM3
INT2
DCD (/RXD)
Phi0 3
IO3
IO19
SPWM4
INT3
RTS
Phi90 3
IO4
IO20
SPWM5
STINT1
DTR (/RTS)
Index 3
IO5
IO21
SPWM6
STINT2
CTS
Phi0 4
IO6
IO22
SPWM7
SPDPINT
DSR (/CTS)
Phi90 4
IO7
IO23
SPWM8
STMRCLK
RI
Index 4
IO8
IO24
SPWM9
STMRDIR
STXD
Phi0 5
IO9
IO25
ST1PWM
SXF
SRXD
Phi90 5
IO10
IO26
ST2PWM
SBIO
Phi0 1
Index 5
IO11
IO27
ST3PWM
SSTE
Phi90 1
Phi0 6
IO12
IO28
SCAP1
SCLK
Index 1
Phi90 6
IO13
IO29
SCAP2
SSIMO
Phi0 2
Index 6
IO14
IO30
SCAP3
SSOMI
Phi90 2
IO15
IO31
SCAP4
CAN
Index 2
(not to scale)
N
The LEDs display the TTL signal level, not the active status of the signal.
(TTL “high” → LED is on; TTL “low” → LED is off).
In order to keep the loading of the signals as low as possible, the LEDs
are run through buffers.
For the incremental sensor signals, there are buffers with true
differential inputs. The pulse length of data signals (CAN, RXD, TXD,
SRXD, STXD) is extended to make even small blocks of data visible.
The power required by the LEDs is taken from the DS1103’s supply
voltage (VCC).
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
191
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Status LEDs of the DS1103
The DS1103 is equipped with 4 red status LEDs that provide
information on the current board status. For details on the location of
the status LEDs, see the illustration in Board Overview on page 161.
The following table provides a description of the LEDs:
LED
Description
PGVCC1
(located next to the
3 rotary switches)
Lit when power is supplied correctly to
the processor core.
PGVCC2
Lit when power is supplied correctly to
the digital logic of the DS1103.
RUN
Lit when the PPC of the DS1103 is
running. After power-up, this LED is
not lit since the PPC is reset.
BEN
(located next to the
analog connector (P1))
Lit whenever the host PC access the
board.
The LEDs also indicate bad power supply or damage to the board.
Problems indicated
If the PGVCC1 LED and PGVCC2 LED are not lit after power-up, check
by the PGVCC1/2 LEDs
■ if the DS1103 is inserted correctly in the host PC or expansion box,
and
■ if the power supply is defective.
Problems indicated
by the RUN LED
If the RUN LED is not lit when you want to start an application on the
board or if this LED does not go out when you want to stop an
application, the connection from ControlDesk to the board’s host
interface is interrupted.
■ Check if the I/O base address settings on the DS1103 match the
settings you specified with ControlDesk’s Platform Manager. For
details, see Changing Default I/O Base Addresses on page 36 and
Registering Platforms in the ControlDesk Experiment Guide.
192
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector Pinouts and LEDs
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
■ If the DS1103 is installed in an expansion box connected to the
host PC via bus interface, see Expansion Box (Bus Connection) on
page 245 for possible errors.
■ If the DS1103 is installed in an expansion box connected to the
host PC via Ethernet without using AutoBoot option, see
Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 for possible
errors.
Problems indicated
by the BEN LED
The following problems are indicated by the BEN LED:
■ If the DS1103 is not operated in Plug & Play mode, the BEN LED
must light up once when the board is registered by ControlDesk.
Otherwise, there is no connection from ControlDesk to the board’s
host interface, which may have the following reasons:
•
Check if the I/O base address settings on the DS1103 match
the settings you specified with ControlDesk’s Platform
Manager. For details, see Changing Default I/O Base Addresses
on page 36 and Registering Platforms in the ControlDesk
Experiment Guide.
•
If the DS1103 is installed in an expansion box connected to the
host PC via bus interface, see Expansion Box (Bus Connection)
on page 245 for possible errors.
•
If the DS1103 is installed in an expansion box connected to the
host PC via Ethernet without using AutoBoot option, see
Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241 for possible
errors.
■ If the DS1103 is operated in Plug & Play mode, the BEN LED must
light up once when the board is registered automatically by
ControlDesk. Otherwise, this indicates an error of the host PC’s
Plug & Play BIOS.
If you use AutoBoot option to operate the DS1103, the board is
accessed and the BEN LED is lit when the slot CPU boots. If
ControlDesk is started later, the BEN LED will not be lit until the
Platform Manager accesses the board.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
193
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Connector Pinouts and LEDs ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
194
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Mapping of I/O Signals
The following table lists the I/O signals of the DS1103 by function
groups, their electrical specifications, and the mapping of these signals
to RTI blocks and RTLib functions.
The table also provides the mapping of the I/O signals to the I/O pins
on the DS1103, on the Sub-D connectors, and on the
CP1103/CLP1103 connector panels.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
195
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicting I/O features
Some I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with other I/O features. In
the table below, these signals are marked with an asterisk “*“.
For an overview, see Conflicting I/O Features on page 206.
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Ch 1
(conv 1)
P1 3
P1B 34
CP1
ADC Unit
•
•
•
Input voltage range: ±10 V
ADCH1 … ADCH16: input for A/D converter with 16-bit resolution
ADCH17 … ADCH20: input for A/D converter with 12-bit resolution
ADCH1
DS1103MUX_ADC_CONx
Conv 1
ch 1
See ADC Unit in the DS1103
RTLib Reference
ADCH2
Conv 1
ch 2
Ch 2
(conv 1)
P1 4
P1A 34
CP2
ADCH3
Conv 1
ch 3
Conv 1
ch 4
Conv 2
ch 1
Conv 2
ch 2
Ch 3
(conv 1)
Ch 4
(conv 1)
Ch 5
(conv 2)
Ch 6
(conv 2)
P1 7
P1B 2
CP3
P1 8
P1A 2
CP4
P1 11
P1B 19
CP5
P1 12
P1A 19
CP6
ADCH7
Conv 2
ch 3
Ch 7
(conv 2)
P1 15
P1B 36
CP7
ADCH8
Conv 2
ch 4
Conv 3
ch 1
Conv 3
ch 2
Conv 3
ch 3
Ch 8
(conv 2)
Ch 9
(conv 3)
Ch 10
(conv 3)
Ch 11
(conv 3)
P1 16
P1A 36
CP8
P1 19
P1B 4
CP9
P1 20
P1A 4
CP10
P1 23
P1B 21
CP11
ADCH12
Conv 3
ch 4
Ch 12
(conv 3)
P1 24
P1A 21
CP12
ADCH13
Conv 4
ch 1
Ch 13
(conv 4)
P1 27
P1B 38
CP13
ADCH14
Conv 4
ch 2
Conv 4
ch 3
Conv 4
ch 4
Ch 17
Ch 14
(conv 4)
Ch 15
(conv 4)
Ch 16
(conv 4)
Ch 17
(conv 5)
P1 28
P1A 38
CP14
P1 31
P1B 6
CP15
P1 32
P1A 6
CP16
P1 35
P1B 23
CP17
ADCH4
ADCH5
ADCH6
ADCH9
ADCH10
ADCH11
ADCH15
ADCH16
ADCH17
DS1103ADC_Cx
See ADC Unit in the DS1103
RTLib Reference
ADCH18
Ch 18
Ch 18
(conv 6)
P1 36
P1A 23
CP18
ADCH19
Ch 19
Ch 19
(conv 7)
P1 39
P1B 40
CP19
ADCH20
Ch 20
Ch 20
(conv 8)
P1 40
P1A 40
CP20
196
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Ch 1
P1 47
P1B 25
CP21
DAC Unit
•
•
•
Output voltage range: ±10 V
Output current range: ±5 mA
DACH1 … DACH8: D/A converter output with 14-bit resolution
DACH1
DS1103DAC_Cx
Ch 1
See DAC Unit in the DS1103
RTLib Reference
DACH2
Ch 2
Ch 2
P1 48
P1A 25
CP22
DACH3
DACH4
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 3
Ch 4
P1 51
P1 52
P1B 42
P1A 42
CP23
CP24
DACH5
Ch 5
Ch 5
P1 55
P1B 10
CP25
DACH6
Ch 6
Ch 6
P1 56
P1A 10
CP26
DACH7
DACH8
Ch 7
Ch 8
Ch 7
Ch 8
P1 59
P1 60
P1B 27
P1A 27
CP27
CP28
Bit 0
(group 1)
P2 5
P2B 18
CP30 1
Bit I/O Unit
•
•
TTL voltage range
Output current range: ±10 mA
IO0
DS1103BIT_IN_Gx /
DS1103BIT_IN8_Gx /
DS1103BIT_OUT_Gx /
DS1103BIT_OUT8_Gx
Group 1
bit 0
See Bit I/O Unit in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
IO1
Group 1
bit 1
Bit 1
(group 1)
P2 6
P2A 18
CP30 18
IO2
Group 1
bit 2
Bit 2
(group 1)
P2 7
P2B 2
CP30 2
IO3
Group 1
bit 3
Group 1
bit 4
Group 1
bit 5
Group 1
bit 6
Bit 3
(group 1)
Bit 4
(group 1)
Bit 5
(group 1)
Bit 6
(group 1)
P2 8
P2A 2
CP30 19
P2 11
P2B 19
CP30 3
P2 12
P2A 19
CP30 20
P2 13
P2B 3
CP30 4
IO7
Group 1
bit 7
Bit 7
(group 1)
P2 14
P2A 3
CP30 21
IO8
Group 2
bit 0
Bit 8
(group 2)
P2 17
P2B 20
CP30 5
IO9
Group 2
bit 1
Group 2
bit 2
Group 2
bit 3
Group 2
bit 4
Bit 9
(group 2)
Bit 10
(group 2)
Bit 11
(group 2)
Bit 12
(group 2)
P2 18
P2A 20
CP30 22
P2 19
P2B 4
CP30 6
P2 20
P2A 4
CP30 23
P2 23
P2B 21
CP30 7
IO13
Group 2
bit 5
Bit 13
(group 2)
P2 24
P2A 21
CP30 24
IO14
Group 2
bit 6
Bit 14
(group 2)
P2 25
P2B 5
CP30 8
IO4
IO5
IO6
IO10
IO11
IO12
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
197
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Group 2
bit 7
Group 3
bit 0
Bit 15
(group 2)
Bit 16
(group 3)
P2 26
P2A 5
CP30 25
P2 29
P2B 22
CP30 9
IO17
Group 3
bit 1
Bit 17
(group 3)
P2 30
P2A 22
CP30 26
IO18
Group 3
bit 2
Bit 18
(group 3)
P2 31
P2B 6
CP30 10
IO19
Group 3
bit 3
Group 3
bit 4
Group 3
bit 5
Group 3
bit 6
Bit 19
(group 3)
Bit 20
(group 3)
Bit 21
(group 3)
Bit 22
(group 3)
P2 32
P2A 6
CP30 27
P2 35
P2B 23
CP30 11
P2 36
P2A 23
CP30 28
P2 37
P2B 7
CP30 12
IO23
Group 3
bit 7
Bit 23
(group 3)
P2 38
P2A 7
CP30 29
IO24
Group 4
bit 0
Bit 24
(group 4)
P2 41
P2B 24
CP30 13
IO25
Group 4
bit 1
Group 4
bit 2
Group 4
bit 3
Bit 25
(group 4)
Bit 26
(group 4)
Bit 27
(group 4)
P2 42
P2A 24
CP30 30
P2 43
P2B 8
CP30 14
P2 44
P2A 8
CP30 31
IO28
Group 4
bit 4
Bit 28
(group 4)
P2 47
P2B 25
CP30 15
IO29
Group 4
bit 5
Bit 29
(group 4)
P2 48
P2A 25
CP30 32
IO30
Group 4
bit 6
Group 4
bit 7
Bit 30
(group 4)
Bit 31
(group 4)
P2 49
P2B 9
CP30 16
P2 50
P2A 9
CP30 33
P3 45
P3B 41
CP32 2
P3 46
P3A 41
CP32 3
P3 47
P3B 25
CP32 4
P3 48
P3A 25
CP32 5
P3 53
P3B 26
CP33 2
P3 54
P3A 26
CP33 3
P3 55
P3B 10
CP33 4
P3 56
P3A 10
CP33 5
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
IO15
IO16
IO20
IO21
IO22
IO26
IO27
IO31
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
I/O Pin on …
Related RTLib Functions
Incremental Encoder Interface
•
Ch 1 … Ch 6: digital (differential RS422 or single-ended TTL) input
•
Ch 7: analog (sinusoidal differential 1 Vpp or 11 µApp) input
•
PHI0(x): digital incremental encoder interface input 0° (PHI0(x): inverted signal)
•
PHI90(x): digital incremental encoder interface input 90° (PHI90(x): inverted signal)
•
IDX(x): digital incremental encoder interface index input (IDX(x): inverted signal)
PHI0(1)
DS1103ENC_POS_Cx /
Ch 1
See Incremental Encoder
DS1103ENC_SET_POS_Cx
Interface in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
PHI0(1)
Ch 1
PHI90(1)
PHI90(1)
PHI0(2)
PHI0(2)
Ch 2
Ch 2
PHI90(2)
PHI90(2)
198
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
PHI0(3)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
Ch 3
Mapping of I/O Signals
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Ch 3
P3 61
P3B 11
CP34 2
PHI0(3)
P3 62
P3A 11
CP34 3
PHI90(3)
P3 63
P3B 44
CP34 4
PHI90(3)
P3 64
P3A 44
CP34 5
P3 69
P3B 45
CP35 2
PHI0(4)
P3 70
P3A 45
CP35 3
PHI90(4)
P3 71
P3B 29
CP35 4
PHI90(4)
P3 72
P3A 29
CP35 5
P3 77
P3B 30
CP36 2
P3 78
P3 79
P3A 30
P3B 14
CP36 3
CP36 4
P3 80
P3 37
P3A 14
P3B 7
CP36 5
CP37 2
P3 38
P3 39
P3A 7
P3B 40
CP37 3
CP37 4
P3 40
P3 29
P3A 40
P3B 22
CP37 5
CP39 2
P3 30
P3 31
P3A 22
P3B 6
CP39 3
CP39 4
PHI0(4)
Ch 4
PHI0(5)
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 5
PHI0(5)
PHI90(5)
PHI90(5)
PHI0(6)
Ch 6
Ch 6
PHI0(6)
PHI90(6)
PHI90(6)
PHI0(7)
Ch 7
Ch 7
PHI0(7)
PHI90(7)
PHI90(7)
IDX(1)
DS1103ENC_SW_INDEX_Cx /
DS1103ENC_HW_INDEX_Cx
Ch 1
See Incremental Encoder
Interface in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
Ch 1
IDX(1)
IDX(2)
IDX(2)
Ch 2
IDX(3)
IDX(3)
Ch 3
IDX(4)
IDX(4)
Ch 4
IDX(5)
IDX(5)
Ch 5
IDX(6)
IDX(6)
Ch 6
IDX(7)
IDX(7)
Ch 7
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 6
Ch 7
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
P3 32
P3A 6
CP39 5
P3 49
P3B 9
CP32 6
P3 50
P3A 9
CP32 7
P3 57
P3B 43
CP33 6
P3 58
P3A 43
CP33 7
P3 65
P3B 28
CP34 6
P3 66
P3A 28
CP34 7
P3 73
P3B 13
CP35 6
P3 74
P3A 13
CP35 7
P3 81
P3B 47
CP36 6
P3 82
P3A 47
CP36 7
P3 41
P3B 24
CP37 6
P3 42
P3A 24
CP37 7
P3 33
P3B 39
CP39 6
P3 34
P3A 39
CP39 7
March 2004
199
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Serial Interface (RS232 mode)
•
•
RS232 voltage range
DCD (data carrier detect), CTS (clear to send), RTS (ready to send), DSR (data set ready), DTR (data terminal ready), RI (ring
indicator), RXD (receive), TXD (transmit)
DCD *
DS1103SER_SETUP /
DS1103SER_STAT /
DS1103SER_TX /
DS1103SER_RX /
DS1103SER_INT_Ix /
DS1103SER_INT_REC_LEV
See Serial Interface
Communication in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
P3 6
P3A 18
CP40 1
CTS *
RTS *
P3 9
P3 7
P3B 35
P3B 2
CP40 8
CP40 7
DSR *
DTR *
P3 10
P3 8
P3A 35
P3A 2
CP40 6
CP40 4
RI *
RXD *
P3 11
P3 5
P3B 19
P3B 18
CP40 9
CP40 2
TXD *
P3 3
P3B 34
CP40 3
Serial Interface (RS422 mode)
•
•
RS422 voltage range
CTS, CTS (clear to send and inverted signal), RTS, RTS (ready to send and inverted signal), RXD, RXD (receive and inverted signal),
TXD, TXD (transmit and inverted signal)
CTS *
DS1103SER_SETUP /
See Serial Interface
P3 9
P3B 35 CP42 8
DS1103SER_STAT /
Communication in the
DS1103SER_TX /
DS1103 RTLib Reference
DS1103SER_RX /
DS1103SER_INT_Ix /
DS1103SER_INT_REC_LEV
RTS *
P3 7
P3B 2
CP42 7
CTS *
RTS *
P3 10
P3 8
P3A 35
P3A 2
CP42 9
CP42 6
RXD *
TXD *
P3 5
P3 3
P3B 18
P3B 34
CP42 3
CP42 2
RXD *
P3 6
P3 4
P3A 18
P3A 34
CP42 4
CP42 1
TXD *
200
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Ch 1
P1 67
P1B 12
CP29 20
Slave DSP ADC Unit
•
Input voltage range: 0 … 5 V
•
SADCH1 … SADCH16: input for A/D converter with 10-bit resolution
SADCH1 *
DS1103SL_DSP_ADC_Cx
Ch 1
See Slave DSP ADC Unit in
the DS1103 RTLib Reference
SADCH2 *
SADCH3
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 2
Ch 3
P1 68
P1 71
P1A 12
P1B 29
CP29 21
CP29 22
SADCH4
SADCH5
Ch 4
Ch 5
Ch 4
Ch 5
P1 72
P1 75
P1A 29
P1B 46
CP29 23
CP29 24
SADCH6
SADCH7
Ch 6
Ch 7
Ch 6
Ch 7
P1 76
P1 79
P1A 46
P1B 14
CP29 25
CP29 26
SADCH8
SADCH9 *
Ch 8
Ch 9
Ch 8
Ch 9
P1 80
P1 83
P1A 14
P1B 31
CP29 27
CP29 28
SADCH10 *
SADCH11
Ch 10
Ch 11
Ch 10
Ch 11
P1 84
P1 87
P1A 31
P1B 48
CP29 29
CP29 30
SADCH12
SADCH13
Ch 12
Ch 13
Ch 12
Ch 13
P1 88
P1 91
P1A 48
P1B 16
CP29 31
CP29 32
SADCH14
Ch 14
Ch 14
P1 92
P1A 16
CP29 33
SADCH15
Ch 15
Ch 15
P1 95
P1B 33
CP29 34
SADCH16
Ch 16
Ch 16
P1 96
P1A 33
CP29 35
Group 1
bit 0
P1 67
P1B 12
CP29 20
Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit
•
TTL voltage range
•
Output current range: ±13 mA
SADCH1 *
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx /
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
Bit 0
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in
the DS1103 RTLib Reference
SADCH2 *
Bit 1
Group 1
bit 1
P1 68
P1A 12
CP29 21
SADCH10 *
Bit 2
Group 1
bit 2
P1 84
P1A 31
CP29 29
SADCH9 *
Bit 3
P1 83
P1B 31
CP29 28
SPWM7 *
Bit 4
P2 71
P2B 29
CP31 10
SPWM8 *
Bit 5
P2 72
P2A 29
CP31 29
SPWM9 *
Bit 6
Group 1
bit 3
Group 2
bit 0
Group 2
bit 1
Group 2
bit 2
P2 73
P2B 13
CP31 11
ST2PWM *
Bit 7
Group 2
bit 4
P2 60
P2A 27
CP31 5
ST3PWM
Bit 8
Group 2
bit 5
P2 61
P2B 11
CP31 24
STMRDIR
Bit 9
P2 55
P2B 10
CP31 31
STMRCLK
Bit 10
P2 56
P2A 10
CP31 12
SADCSOC
Bit 11
Group 2
bit 6
Group 2
bit 7
Group 3
bit 0
P1 99
P1B 50
CP29 37
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
201
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Group 3
bit 2
Group 3
bit 3
P2 83
P2B 31
CP31 18
P2 84
P2A 31
CP31 36
SXF
Bit 12
SBIO
Bit 13
SCAP1 *
Bit 14
Group 3
bit 4
P2 77
P2B 30
CP31 2
SCAP2 *
Bit 15
Group 3
bit 5
P2 78
P2A 30
CP31 21
SCAP3 *
Bit 16
P2 79
P2B 14
CP31 3
SCAP4 *
Bit 17
Group 3
bit 6
Group 3
bit 7
Group 2
bit 3
P2 80
P2A 14
CP31 22
P2 59
P2B 27
CP31 23
Ch 1
P2 60
P2A 27
CP31 5
ST1PWM *
_
Slave DSP Timing I/O Unit
•
•
TTL output voltage range
Output current range: ±13 mA
ST2PWM *
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM
Ch 1
See Slave DSP PWM
Generation in the DS1103
RTLib Reference
SPWM7 *
Ch 2
Ch 2
P2 71
P2B 29
CP31 10
SPWM8 *
SPWM9 *
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 3
Ch 4
P2 72
P2 73
P2A 29
P2B 13
CP31 29
CP31 11
Phase 1
P2 65
P2B 28
CP31 7
SPWM1 *
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM3 /
DS1103SL_DSP_PWMSV
Phase 1
See Slave DSP PWM3
Generation /
Slave DSP PWMSV
Generation in the DS1103
RTLib Reference
SPWM3 *
Phase 2
Phase 2
P2 67
P2B 12
CP31 8
SPWM5 *
SPWM2
Phase 3
Phase 1
(inverted)
Phase 2
(inverted)
Phase 3
Phase 1
(inverted)
Phase 2
(inverted)
P2 69
P2 66
P2B 45
P2A 28
CP31 9
CP31 26
P2 68
P2A 12
CP31 27
Phase 3
(inverted)
Phase 3
(inverted)
P2 70
P2A 45
CP31 28
P2 59
P2B 27
CP31 23
Ch 1
P2 65
P2B 28
CP31 7
SPWM4
SPWM6
ST1PWM *
DS1103SLAVE_PWMINT
See
ds1103_slave_dsp_pwm3_int
_init in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal Generation (D2F)
•
TTL output voltage range
•
Output current range: ±13 mA
SPWM1 *
DS1103SL_DSP_D2F
Ch 1
SPWM3 *
Ch 2
Ch 2
P2 67
P2B 12
CP31 8
SPWM5 *
ST2PWM *
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 3
Ch 4
P2 69
P2 60
P2B 45
P2A 27
CP31 9
CP31 5
202
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
See Square Wave Signal
Generation (D2F) in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
Ch 1
P2 77
P2B 30
CP31 2
CP31 21
Slave DSP PWM Signal Measurement (PWM2D)
•
TTL input voltage range
SCAP1 *
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM2D
Ch 1
See Slave DSP PWM
Measurement (PWM2D) in
the DS1103 RTLib Reference
SCAP2 *
Ch 2
Ch 2
P2 78
P2A 30
SCAP3 *
Ch 3
Ch 3
P2 79
P2B 14
CP31 3
SCAP4 *
Ch 4
Ch 4
P2 80
P2A 14
CP31 22
Ch 1
P2 77
P2B 30
CP31 2
CP31 21
Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal Measurement (F2D)
•
TTL input voltage range
SCAP1 *
DS1103SL_DSP_F2D
Ch 1
See Square Wave Signal
Measurement (F2D) in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
SCAP2 *
Ch 2
Ch 2
P2 78
P2A 30
SCAP3 *
Ch 3
Ch 3
P2 79
P2B 14
CP31 3
SCAP4 *
Ch 4
Ch 4
P2 80
P2A 14
CP31 22
P2 88
P2A 48
CP31 34
Slave DSP Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
•
•
•
•
•
•
TTL voltage range
Output current range: ±13 mA
SSOMI: SPI slave out, master in
SSIMO: SPI slave in, master out
SSTE: SPI slave transmit enable
SSCLK: SPI clock
SSOMI
–
See Slave DSP Serial
Peripheral Interface in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
SSIMO
SSTE
–
–
P2 87
P2 86
P2B 48
P2A 15
CP31 16
CP31 35
SCLK
–
P2 85
P2B 15
CP31 17
P3 15
P3B 36
CP41 2
P3 13
P3B 3
CP41 3
P3 15
P3B 36
CP43 3
Slave DSP Serial Communication Interface (SCI) (RS232 mode)
•
RS232 voltage range
•
SRXD (receive), STXD (transmit)
SRXD
–
STXD
See Slave DSP Serial
Communication Interface in
the DS1103 RTLib Reference
–
Slave DSP Serial Communication Interface (SCI) (RS422 mode)
•
•
RS422 voltage range
SRXD, SRXD (receive and inverted signal), STXD, STXD (transmit and inverted signal)
SRXD
–
See Slave DSP Serial
Communication Interface in
the DS1103 RTLib Reference
SRXD
STXD
–
–
P3 16
P3 13
P3A 36
P3B 3
CP43 4
CP43 2
STXD
–
P3 14
P3A 3
CP43 1
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
203
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Channel/Bit Numbers of Related RTI Blocks/RTLib Functions
Signal
Related RTI Block(s)
Ch/Bit
(RTI)
Related RTLib Functions
I/O Pin on …
Ch/Bit
(RTLib)
Sub-D
DS1103 Conn.
CP/CLP
P3 85
P3B 15
CP38 2
P3 87
P3B 48
CP38 7
Ext int 0
P2 91
P2B 16
CP30 46
CP30 47
CAN Support
•
ISO11898
•
CANL (CAN bus interface low), CANH (CAN bus interface high)
CANL
RTICAN CONTROLLER SETUP /
See Slave MC Access
RTICAN Transmit (TX) /
Functions in the DS1103
RTICAN Receive (RX) /
RTLib Reference
RTICAN Request (RQ) /
RTICAN Remote (RM) /
RTICAN Interrupt /
RTICAN Status /
RTICAN Bus Off Recovery /
RTICAN Go Bus Off
CANH
User Interrupts
•
TTL input voltage range
INT0
DS1103MASTER_HWINT_Ix
User int 1
See Interrupt Handling in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
INT1
User int 2
Ext int 1
P2 92
P2A 16
INT2
User int 3
Ext int 2
P2 93
P2B 49
CP30 48
INT3
User int 4
Ext int 3
P2 94
P2A 49
CP30 49
GND pins
The following I/O pins provide GND potential:
Connector
Pin
DS1103
Analog connector
P1
1, 2, 5, 6, 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21, 22,
25, 26, 29, 30, 33, 34, 37, 38, 41 … 46,
49, 50, 53, 54, 57, 58, 61 … 66, 69, 70,
73, 74, 77, 78, 81, 82, 85, 86, 89, 90, 93,
94, 97, 98, 100
1 … 4, 9, 10 ,15, 16, 21, 22, 27, 28, 33,
34, 39, 40, 45, 46, 51, 52, 57, 58, 63, 64,
74 … 76, 81, 82, 89, 90, 99, 100
1, 2, 12, 27, 28, 35, 36, 43, 44, 51, 52,
59, 60, 67, 68, 75, 76, 83, 84, 86,
88 … 90, 99, 100
Digital connector
P2
Incremental encoder/
digital connector
P3
Sub-D connectors
P1A, P1B
1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 18, 20, 22,
24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 37, 39, 41,
43 … 45, 47, 49, 50 (only P1A)
P2A, P2B
P3A, P3B
1, 13 (only P2A), 32, 34 … 44, 46, 47, 50
1, 8, 12, 15 (only P3A), 19 (only P3A), 23,
27, 31, 32, 38, 42, 46, 48 (only P3A), 50
CP1103/CLP1103 connector panel
204
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
BNC
CP1 … CP28
Shell
Slave ADC
Digital I/O
CP29
CP30
1 … 19, 36
17, 34 … 45
Slave I/O
CP31
1, 4, 6, 13, 15, 20, 25, 30, 37
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Connector
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Pin
Incremental encoder
iInterface
CAN
CP32 … CP37,
CP39
CP38
8, 10 … 15
UART RS232
CP40
5
Slave RS232
CP41
5
UART RS422
Slave RS422
CP42
CP43
5
5
3, 5, 6
GND of the DS1103 is internally connected to PC ground.
VCC pins
The following I/O pins provide access to the PC power supply VCC
(5 V):
Connector
Pin
DS1103
Digital connector
Incremental encoder/
digital connector
Sub-D connectors
P2
P3
P2A, P2B
P3A, P3B
•
•
•
•
VCC1: 95 … 98
VCC2: 91 … 94
VCC3: 95 … 98
VCC1: 17, 33
•
•
VCC2: 16, 49
VCC3: 17, 33
CP1103/CLP1103 connector panel
Digital I/O
CP30
Slave I/O
CP31
Incremental encoder interface CP32 … CP37,
CP39
N
50
19
1, 9
DS1103 and Sub-D connector
The DS1103 provides three VCC
lines. The total load of every VCC line (VCC1, VCC2 or VCC3) must
not exceed 500 mA.
CP1103/CLP1103 connector panels All VCC1, VCC2, and
VCC3 lines of the DS1103 are connected on the CP1103/CLP1103
and called VCC. The total load of all connector pins that provide
access to the PC power supply must not exceed 1.5 A (CP1103) or
0.75 A (CLP1103).
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
205
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicting I/O Features
Conflicts
There are I/O features that share the same board resources.
Conflicts concerning single I/O channels
There are conflicts that
concern single channels of an I/O feature. The dSPACE board provides
only a limited number of I/O pins. The same pins may be shared by
different I/O features. However, one pin can serve as the I/O channel
for only one feature at a time.
Conflicts concerning an I/O feature as a whole
There are
conflicts that concern the use of an I/O feature as a whole. Suppose
two I/O features of the dSPACE board use the same on-board timer
device. In this case, only one of the two I/O features can be used at a
time. The other feature is completely blocked.
Conflicts for the DS1103
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with other
I/O features:
■ Serial Interface: see page 207
■ Slave DSP ADC Unit: see page 207
■ Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit: see page 208
■ Slave DSP 1-Phase PWM Signal Generation (PWM): see page 209
■ Slave DSP 3-Phase PWM Signal Generation (PWM3): see page 209
■ Slave DSP Space Vector PWM Signal Generation (PWMSV): see
page 210
■ Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal Generation (D2F): see page 211
■ Slave DSP PWM Signal Measurement (PWM2D): see page 212
■ Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal Measurement: see page 213
206
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicts for the Serial Interface
The master PPC of the DS1103 supports only one serial interface. It
can be configured as either RS232 or RS422 transceiver.
Conflicts for the Slave DSP ADC Unit
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with the
Slave DSP ADC unit:
Slave DSP ADC Unit *)
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Signal
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Single Channels
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 1
Ch 2
SADCH1
SADCH2
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 0
Bit 1
Group 1, bit 0
Group 1, bit 1
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 3
Ch 4
SADCH9
SADCH10
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 3
Bit 2
Group 1, bit 3
Group 1, bit 2
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
functions:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_ADC_Cx
•
See Slave DSP ADC Unit in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx / DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
•
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
207
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicts for the Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with the
Slave DSP bit I/O unit:
Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit *)
Bit
(RTI)
Bit
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Signal
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Single Bits
Bit 0
Group 1, bit 0
SADCH1
Slave DSP ADC unit
Ch 1
Ch 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Group 1, bit 1
Group 1, bit 2
SADCH2
SADCH10
Slave DSP ADC unit
Slave DSP ADC unit
Ch 2
Ch 10
Ch 2
Ch 10
Bit 3
Bit 4
Group 1, bit 3
Group 2, bit 0
SADCH9
SPWM7
Slave DSP ADC unit
PWM
Ch 9
Ch 2
Ch 9
Ch 2
Bit 5
Group 2, bit 1
SPWM8
PWM
Ch 3
Ch 3
Bit 6
Group 2, bit 2
SPWM9
PWM
Ch 4
Ch 4
Bit 7
Group 2, bit 4
ST2PWM
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bit 14
Group 3, bit 4
SCAP1
PWM2D/F2D
Ch 1
Ch 1
Bit 15
Group 3, bit 5
SCAP2
PWM2D/F2D
Ch 2
Ch 2
Bit 16
Bit 17
Group 3, bit 6
Group 3, bit 7
SCAP3
SCAP4
PWM2D/F2D
PWM2D/F2D
Ch 3
Ch 4
Ch 3
Ch 4
Group 2, bit 3
ST1PWM
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
functions:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx /
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
•
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in
the DS1103 RTLib Reference
208
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
PWM
D2F
Ch 1
Ch 4
Ch 1
Ch 4
Slave DSP PWM int
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
Slave DSP ADC unit:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx / DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
•
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
PWM:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM
•
See Slave DSP PWM Generation in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
D2F:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_D2F
•
See Square Wave Signal Generation (D2F) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
PWM2D:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM2D
•
See Slave DSP PWM Measurement (PWM2D) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
F2D:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_F2D
•
See Square Wave Signal Measurement (F2D) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
Slave DSP PWM int:
•
DS1103SLAVE_PWMINT
•
See ds1103_slave_dsp_pwm3_int_init in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicts for Slave DSP 1-Phase PWM Signal Generation
(PWM)
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with Slave DSP
1-Phase PWM Signal Generation:
Slave DSP 1-Phase PWM
Signal Generation (PWM) *)
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Ch
(RTI)
Signal
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Slave DSP 1-Phase PWM Signal Generation as a Whole
•
If you use channel 4 of D2F, you cannot generate 1-phase PWM signals at the same time.
Conflicts Concerning Single Channels
Ch 1
Ch 1
ST2PWM
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 7
Group 2, bit 4
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 2
Ch 3
SPWM7
SPWM8
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 4
Bit 5
Group 2, bit 0
Group 2, bit 1
SPWM9
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 6
Group 2, bit 2
Ch 4
Ch 4
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
functions:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM
•
See Slave DSP PWM
Generation in the DS1103
RTLib Reference
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
D2F:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_D2F
•
See Square Wave Signal Generation (D2F) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx /
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
•
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
Conflicts for Slave DSP 3-Phase PWM Signal
Generation (PWM3)
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with Slave DSP
3-Phase PWM Signal Generation:
Slave DSP 3-Phase PWM
Signal Generation (PWM3) *)
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Signal
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Slave DSP 3-Phase PWM Signal Generation as a Whole
•
If you perform space vector PWM signal generation (PWMSV) or square-wave signal generation (D2F), you cannot
generate 3-phase PWM signals at the same time.
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
functions:
PWMSV:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM3
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWMSV
•
See Slave DSP PWM3
•
See Slave DSP PWMSV Generation in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
Generation in the DS1103
D2F:
RTLib Reference
•
DS1103SL_DSP_D2F
•
See Square Wave Signal Generation (D2F) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
209
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicts for Slave DSP Space Vector PWM Signal
Generation (PWMSV)
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with Slave DSP
Space Vector PWM Signal Generation:
Slave DSP Space Vector PWM
Signal Generation
(PWMSV) *)
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Signal
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Slave DSP 3-Phase PWM Signal Generation as a Whole
•
If you perform 3-phase PWM signal generation (PWM3) or square-wave signal generation (D2F), you cannot generate
space vector PWM signals at the same time.
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
functions:
3-phase PWM signal generation (PWM3):
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM3
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWMSV
•
See Slave DSP PWM3 Generation in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
•
See Slave DSP PWMSV
Generation in the DS1103
D2F:
RTLib Reference
•
DS1103SL_DSP_D2F
•
See Square Wave Signal Generation (D2F) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
210
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicts for Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal
Generation (D2F)
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with Slave DSP
Square-Wave Signal Generation:
Slave DSP Square-Wave
Signal Generation (D2F) *)
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Ch
(RTI)
Signal
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal Generation as a Whole
•
If you perform 3-phase or space vector PWM signal generation (PWM3 or PWMSV), you cannot generate square-wave
signals at the same time.
Conflicts Concerning Single Channels
Ch 4
Ch 4
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
functions:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_D2F
•
See Square Wave Signal
Generation (D2F) in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
ST2PWM
•
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
•
Bit 7
•
•
PWM
•
Ch 1
•
Group 2, bit
4
Ch 1
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
PWM3/PWMSV:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM3/DS1103SL_DSP_PWMSV
•
See Slave DSP PWM3 Generation/Slave DSP PWMSV Generation in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx / DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
•
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
PWM:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM
•
See Slave DSP PWM Generation in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
211
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicts for Slave DSP PWM Signal Measurement
(PWM2D)
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with Slave DSP PWM
Signal Measurement:
Slave DSP PWM Signal
Measurement (PWM2D) *)
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Ch
(RTI)
Signal
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Slave DSP PWM Signal Measurement as a Whole
•
If you perform square-wave signal measurement (F2D), you cannot measure PWM signals at the same time.
Conflicts Concerning Single Channels
Ch 1
Ch 1
SCAP1
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 14
Group 3, bit 4
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 2
Ch 3
SCAP2
SCAP3
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 15
Bit 16
Group 3, bit 5
Group 3, bit 6
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 17
Group 3, bit 7
Ch 4
Ch 4
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
functions:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM2D
•
See Slave DSP PWM
Measurement (PWM2D) in
the DS1103 RTLib Reference
212
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
SCAP4
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
F2D:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_F2D
•
See Square Wave Signal Measurement (F2D) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx/ DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
•
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Mapping of I/O Signals
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Conflicts for Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal
Measurement (F2D)
The following I/O features of the DS1103 conflict with Slave DSP
Square-Wave Signal Measurement:
Slave DSP Square-Wave
Signal Measurement (F2D) *)
Ch
(RTI)
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicting I/O Feature **)
Ch
(RTI)
Signal
Ch
(RTLib)
Conflicts Concerning Slave DSP Square-Wave Signal Measurement as a Whole
•
If you perform PWM signal measurement (PWM2D), you cannot measure square-wave signals at the same time.
Conflicts Concerning Single Channels
Ch 1
Ch 1
SCAP1
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 6
Group 3, bit 4
Ch 2
Ch 3
Ch 2
Ch 3
SCAP2
SCAP3
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 7
Bit 8
Group 3, bit 5
Group 3, bit 6
Slave DSP Bit I/O unit
Bit 9
Group 3, bit 7
Ch 4
Ch 4
*) Related RTI blocks and RTLib
functions:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_F2D
•
See Square Wave Signal
Measurement (F2D) in the
DS1103 RTLib Reference
SCAP4
**) Related RTI blocks and RTLib functions:
PWM2D:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_PWM2D
•
See Slave DSP PWM Measurement (PWM2D) in the DS1103 RTLib
Reference
Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit:
•
DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_IN_Cx/ DS1103SL_DSP_BIT_OUT_Cx
•
See Slave DSP Bit I/O Unit in the DS1103 RTLib Reference
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
213
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Mapping of I/O Signals ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
214
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Data Sheets
For the technical data of the DS1103 and the optional connector
panels CP1103/CLP1103, see:
■ DS1103 Data Sheet on page 216
■ CLP1103 Data Sheet on page 220
■ CLP1103 Data Sheet on page 220
For the technical data of the available expansion boxes, see:
■ PX4 Data Sheet on page 221
■ PX10 Data Sheet on page 222
■ PX20 Data Sheet on page 223
■ AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox on page 224
For the technical data of the DS830 MultiLink Panel, see:
■ DS830 Data Sheet on page 234
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
215
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
DS1103 Data Sheet
The following table shows the data sheet of the DS1103. The
specifications stated are valid up to board revision DS1103-07.
Parameter
Specification
Processor
PowerPC processor PPC604e
Memory
•
•
256Kx64-bit local memory SRAM (2 MB)
16Mx64-bit global memory SDRAM (128 MB)
Timer
•
•
32-bit downcounter with reload register 30 ns resolution
32-bit upcounter with compare register 60 ns resolution
Interrupt controller
•
•
Interrupt controller with 22 interrupt sources
4 external interrupts
Temperature sensor
Temperature sensor for the PPC
ADCs
4 x 16-bit ADC with mux
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ADCs
4 x 12-bit ADC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
216
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
16 muxed channels equipped with four 16-bit sample & hold
ADCs (4 channels belong to one ADC. 4 consecutive samplings
are necessary to sample all channels belonging to one ADC.)
Note: 8 ADC channels (4 x 16-bit + 4 x 12-bit) can be sampled
simultaneous
±10 V input range
4 µs conversion time
±5 mV offset error
±0.25% gain error
4 ppm/K offset drift
25 ppm/K gain drift
>80 dB signal to noise ratio
4 channels each equipped with one 12-bit sample & hold ADC
Note: 8 ADC channels (4 x 16-bit + 4 x 12-bit) can be sampled
simultaneous
±10 V input range
800 ns conversion time
±5 mV offset error
±0.5% gain error
4 ppm/K offset drift
25 ppm/K gain drift
>65 dB signal to noise ratio
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Data Sheets
Parameter
Specification
DACs
8x14-bit DAC
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
±10 V output range
5 µs settling time (12bit)
±1 mV offset error
±0.5% gain error
3 ppm/K offset drift
25 ppm/K gain drift
Imax = ±5 mA
CImax = 10 nF
1 Analog Incremental
Encoder
•
•
•
Selectable 1 Vpp or 11 µApp mode
Resolution < 5º
Max. 0.6 MHz input frequency, i.e. fourfold pulse counts up to
2.4 MHz
32-bit loadable position counter
5 V/1 A sensor supply voltage
ADC performance 6 bits, 10MSPS
•
•
•
6 Digital Incremental
Encoder
•
•
Selectable TTL or differential input
Fourfold pulse multiplication
Max. 1.65 MHz input frequency, i.e. fourfold pulse counts up to
6.6 MHz
24-bit loadable position counter
5 V/1 A sensor supply voltage
Digital I/O
•
•
•
•
32-bit parallel I/O
Each 8 bit group can be set to input or output
Ioutmax = ±10 mA
TTL output/input levels
CAN
•
•
Microcontroller-based CAN Subsystem with ISO 11898
integrated net-transceiver
1 Mbaud
•
•
•
TL16C550 UART with FIFO
RS232/RS422 selectable
Max. 1 Mbaud
V24
•
•
•
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
217
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Parameter
Specification
Slave DSP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Texas Instruments TMS320F240 DSP
20 MHz clock rate
64Kx16 external code memory
28Kx16 external data memory
4Kx16 dual-port memory for communication
16 ADC inputs
12 PWM outputs
4 capture inputs
2 serial ports
TTL output/input levels for all digital I/O pins
Maximum output current: ±13 mA
0 … 5V ADC input range
Host interface
•
•
•
Eight 16-bit I/O ports in the 64K host I/O space
Processor/host and host/processor interrupts
Plug-and-Play support
Physical Size
•
•
340 x 125 x 45 mm (13.4 x 4.9 x 1.77 in)
Requires one length PC/AT ISA slot and three brackets
Ambient temperature
0 … 50 ºC
Power supply
•
•
•
N
+5V ±5 %, 6A
+12V ±5 %, 0.75A
–12V ±5 %, 0.25A
The TTL signals have the following voltage ranges:
■ High signal: voltage > 2.4 V
■ Low signal: voltage < 0.8 V
218
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
CP1103 Data Sheet
The following table shows the data sheet of the CP1103 Connector
Panel.
Parameter
Specifications
Grounding
The enclosure and the front panel are not grounded.
Cable length
2 m (6.6 ft) standard
Physical size (with desktop enclosure)
(length x depth x height)
433.5 x 142.5 x 70 mm (17.07 x 5.61 x 2.75 in)
Space needed for 19” rack mount
Height 3 U; width 16.8“
Weight
Approx. 3.8 kg (8.4 lbs); incl. enclosure and shielded
ribbon cables
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
219
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
CLP1103 Data Sheet
The following table shows the data sheet of the CLP1103
Connector/LED Combi Panel.
220
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Parameter
Specifications
Power consumption
5 V; max. 750 mA (via DS1103 board)
Grounding
The enclosure and the front panel are not grounded.
Cable length
2 m (6.6 ft) standard
Physical size (with desktop enclosure)
(length x depth x height)
647 x 142.5 x 70 mm
(25.47 x 5.61 x 2.75 in)
Space needed for 19” rack mount
Height 3 U; width 16.8“ + height 3 U; width 8.4“
(2 slots needed)
Weight
Approx. 4.3 kg (9.5 lbs); incl. enclosure and shielded
ribbon cables
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
PX4 Data Sheet
The following table provides the technical characteristics of the PX4:
Parameter
Specification
Chassis
•
•
•
•
•
Desktop box
4 full-size 16-bit ISA slots
1 slot reserved for Link Board or slot CPU board for
Ethernet connection
1 additional slot required if AutoBoot option is used
Low-noise fan cooling
Power supply
•
•
90 … 264 V AC, autoranging
60 W
Maximum output current
7A@5V
Grounding
Circuit ground is connected to the chassis and through that
to the power system’s protective ground.
Physical size
(height x width x depth)
110 x 164 x 425 mm (4.3 x 6.5 x 16.7 in)
Weight (without boards)
3.2 kg (7.0 lbs)
Ambient temperature
0 … 50 °C (32 … 122 °F)
Humidity
0 … 95 %, non-condensing
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
221
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
PX10 Data Sheet
The following table provides the technical characteristics of the PX10:
Parameter
Specification
Chassis 1)
•
•
•
•
•
Desktop box
10 full-size 16-bit ISA slots
1 slot reserved for Link Board or slot CPU board for
Ethernet connection
1 additional slot required if AutoBoot option is used
Fan cooling
Power supply
•
•
•
85 … 265 V AC, autoranging
250 W (up to revision 1.2) 1)
300 W (as of revision 1.3)
Maximum output current
•
•
22 A @ 5 V (up to revision 1.2)
33 A @ 5 V (as of revision 1.3)
Reset switch
•
•
The switch has no function.
The lamp in the switch lights up when the expansion box
power supply provides +12 V.
Approx. 10,000 h life span of the lamp
•
Grounding
Circuit ground is connected to the chassis and through that
to the power system’s protective ground.
Physical size
(height x width x depth)
164 x 344 x 444 mm (6.5 x 13.5 x 17.5 in)
Weight (without boards)
11.3 kg (24.9 lbs)
Ambient temperature
0 … 50 °C (32 … 122 °F)
Humidity
0 … 95 %, non-condensing
1) As of revision 1.3, the revision number is labeled on the chassis and the PX10 is prepared for inserting the DS1006 Processor
Board. For more details on the different revisions, refer to http://www.dspace.de/goto?pxboxvers.
222
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
PX20 Data Sheet
The following table provides the technical characteristics of the PX20:
Parameter
Specification
Chassis 1)
•
•
•
•
•
Desktop box
19” rack-mount version available (height: 4 U)
20 full-size 16-bit ISA slots
1 slot reserved for Link Board or slot CPU board
for Ethernet connection
1 additional slot required if AutoBoot option is
used
Triple-fan cooling, temperature-dependent speed
Power supply
•
•
•
90 … 264 V AC, autoranging
400 W @ 90 … 150 V AC
450 W @ 170 … 264 V AC
Maximum output current
60 A @ 5 V
Reset switch
•
•
Grounding
Circuit ground is connected to the chassis and
through that to the power system’s protective
ground.
Physical size
(height x width x depth)
164 x 435 x 557 mm (6.5 x 17.1 x 21.9 in)
Weight (without boards)
18.1 kg (39.8 lbs)
Ambient temperature
0 … 50 °C (32 … 122 °F)
Humidity
0 … 95 %, non-condensing
•
•
The switch has no function.
The lamp in the switch lights up when the
expansion box power supply provides +12 V.
Approx. 10,000 h life span of the lamp
1) As of revision 3.2, the revision number is labeled on the chassis and the PX20 is prepared for inserting the DS1006 Processor
Board. For more details on the different revisions, refer to http://www.dspace.de/goto?pxboxvers.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
223
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox
The main differences between AutoBox and Tandem-AutoBox are the
following:
■ Tandem-AutoBox doubles the space for inserting dSPACE boards.
■ Tandem-AutoBox contains two identical power supplies to cover
the increased power requirement.
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox Data Sheet
The following table provides the technical characteristics of the
AutoBox and the Tandem-AutoBox.
Parameter
General
Specification
Chassis
•
•
Compact aluminum chassis
Shock mounts with rubber shoes
Slots
•
•
•
7 full-size 16-bit ISA slots (AutoBox)
14 full-size 16-bit ISA slots (Tandem-AutoBox)
1 slot reserved for Link Board or slot CPU board for
Ethernet connection
1 additional slot required if AutoBoot option is
used
•
Cooling and heating
224
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
•
•
Temperature-controlled fan with dust filter 1)
Heater (optional) 1)
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Parameter
Power supply
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Specification
AutoBox
One power supply
Tandem-AutoBox
•
•
Two power supplies (each identical to the AutoBox
power supply). They must both be connected.
All specifications stated here are valid for each of
the two built-in power supplies.
Operating principle
Two-stage switching power supply with wide input
voltage range and independent output regulation.
Input voltage
•
•
•
8 V … 60 V DC normal operating range without
heater
8 V … 36 V DC normal operating range with
heater
100 V DC absolute maximum rating
Load-dump protection up to 120 V
Input current
•
•
20 A at 12 V nominal
10 A at 24 V nominal
Overcurrent
protection
•
•
32 A foldback current line
60 A external fuse
Start-up current
≤ 50 A
•
Quiescent current
< 1 mA with remote off
Output voltages
•
•
•
+5 V, 20 A
+12 V, 1.5 A
–12 V, 1.5 A
Output power
135 W at 12 V nominal input voltage
Efficiency
60 % at 12 V nominal input voltage
Input/output isolation
250 V
Remote control
Overvoltage protected remote on/off input. The
remote voltage should not exceed the supply voltage.
Overvoltage protection of the remote pin is also 100 V.
If you connect the remote pin to the car battery
directly, the AutoBox will always be turned on, and the
car battery will then soon be exhausted if the engine is
not running. A switch is therefore highly
recommended.
Input resistance at
remote input
•
•
47 kΩ tied to GND
The input resistance also protects the remote input
if the remote signal is switched on while the supply
voltage is missing due to a blown fuse, for
example.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
225
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Parameter
Power supply
Heater
(optional)
Specification
Remote on voltage
>4V
Remote off voltage
<1V
Power input
connector
•
•
Operating principle
The heater is a PTC thermistor (PTC = positive
temperature coefficient). It regulates the heat output
power itself, depending on the temperature of the air
flow from the upstreamed fan:
• Low temperature -> high current -> high heat
output
• High temperature -> low current -> low heat
output
7-pin male connector
For the pinout refer to Power Input Connector on
page 232.
The PTC is switched on automatically by the AutoBox
power supply, if the temperature of the air flow is
below 0 °C (32 °F).
•
•
60 W … 200 W, temperature-controlled
From car battery
Mounting positions
•
•
•
Horizontal position (with shock mounts below)
Vertical position
Not allowed: upside down position
Grounding
Circuit ground is connected to ground of the
backplane, which is isolated from car battery ground.
Power
consumption 2)
Physical size
Weight
(without boards)
AutoBox
Refer to AutoBox Dimension Drawings on page 227.
Tandem-AutoBox
Refer to Tandem-AutoBox Dimension Drawings on
page 229.
AutoBox
Approx. 5.3 kg (11.7 lbs)
Tandem-AutoBox
Approx. 10.6 kg (21.2 lbs)
Ambient temperature
•
•
0 … 55 °C (32 … 131 °F)
–10 … 55° C (14 … 131 °F) with optional heater
1) In a Tandem-AutoBox two fans/two heaters (if this option is used) are installed.
2) The specification stated is valid only for one heater. Note: If you use Tandem-AutoBox with the heater option, two heaters are
installed and therefore the power consumption doubles.
226
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
AutoBox Dimension Drawings
N
For mounting you should add approx. 0.1 m (3.9 in.) space to the
outer dimensions of the AutoBox. This is to allow the AutoBox to
vibrate under extreme conditions without bumping against other
devices.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
227
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
AutoBox without
The following diagrams show the physical dimensions of the AutoBox
heater
without heater.
435 mm (17.1 in.)
195 mm
(7.7 in.)
165 mm
(6.5 in.)
480 mm (18.9 in.)
463 mm (18.2 in.)
220 mm
(8.6 in.)
195 mm
(7.7 in.)
170 mm
(6.7 in.)
33 mm
(1.3 in.)
395 mm (15.5 in.)
6.4 mm dia.
(0.25 in.)
Not to scale
24.5 mm
(0.96 in.)
67 mm
(2.63 in.)
228
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
AutoBox with heater
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The following diagram shows the physical dimensions of the AutoBox
with heater that diverge from the one without heater.
517.5 mm (20.4 in.)
485 mm (19.1 in.)
Not to scale
Tandem-AutoBox Dimension Drawings
N
For mounting you should add approx. 0.1 m (3.9 in.) space to the
outer dimensions of the Tandem-AutoBox. This is to allow the
Tandem-AutoBox to vibrate under extreme conditions without
bumping against other devices.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
229
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Tandem-AutoBox
without heater
The following diagrams show the physical dimensions of the
Tandem-AutoBox without heater.
435 mm (17.1 in.)
195 mm
(7.7 in.)
165 mm
(6.5 in.)
495 mm (19.5 in.)
120 mm (4.7 in.)
415 mm
(16.6 in.)
240 mm (9.4 in.)
120 mm (4.7 in.)
390 mm
(15.35 in.)
368 mm
(14.5 in.)
6.4 mm dia.
(0.25 in.)
24.5 mm
(0.96 in.)
135 mm (5.31 in.)
230
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
Not to scale
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Tandem-AutoBox with
heater
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
The following diagram shows the physical dimensions of the
Tandem-AutoBox with heater that diverge from the one without
heater.
525 mm (20.7 in.)
485 mm (19.1 in.)
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
231
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Power Input Connector
Each power supply unit provides a power input connector. It is a 7-pin,
male connector with two high-current pins. It is adapted from a 15-pin
Sub-D connector.
One mating connector with connecting leads is included in the
AutoBox package (Tandem-AutoBox = two connectors).
The following illustration shows the pinout (front view).
Connector
Pin
Signal
A2
Positive supply voltage
(8 V … 60 V DC)
A2
2
1
5
4
3
Pin
Signal
5
Reserved, do not use
2
Reserved, do not use
4
Remote control 1)
1
Reserved, do not use
3
Reserved, do not use
A1
Negative supply voltage (0 V)
A1
1) If you use the matching cable supplied by dSPACE the remote control line is connected to positive supply voltage within the
connector shell. This cable is intended for use with a lab power supply only.
C
CAUTION! Reverse polarity destroys the
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox power supply even if the remote
control input is turned off.
■ Double check the supply voltage polarity of AutoBox.
C
CAUTION! Even a brief disconnection of the battery while the
engine is running results in a load dump of the car generator
producing hazardous voltages of more than 100 V.
■ Turn off the engine while connecting or disconnecting the car
battery.
232
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Data Sheets
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Lab Power Supply for AutoBox/TandemAutoBox
For experiments with the AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox in a laboratory,
you can use a laboratory power supply instead of the car battery. In
this case you should note the requirements and information provided
below. The following explanations relate only to the “AutoBox”.
Therefore the values stated are valid only for one power supply.
■ The specified input voltage for the AutoBox power supply
(8 V … 60 V DC normal operating range) must not be exceeded.
■ Your laboratory power supply must be able to supply approx.
240 W continuous output power. This means, for example if all
slots in the AutoBox are filled:
•
At 12 V nominal input voltage your lab power supply must
provide 20 A.
•
At 60 V input voltage (max. permissible) your lab power supply
must provide 4 A.
Good results have been optained with 24 V-laboratory power
supplies.
■ If your lab power supply provides adjustable current limiting: Use
always the maximum value.
■ The AutoBox needs nearly 50 A start-up current on power-up for a
few ms (regardless of the input voltage and the load). If your lab
power supply does not provide this current, you can take the
following measures:
•
Connect a capacitor parallel to the output pins of the lab
power supply. It works like a current reservoir to reduce the
load on the lab power supply during turning on the AutoBox.
•
The capacitor should be generously dimensioned and must be
certified for the selected input voltage.
N
The capacitor provides the needed start-up current only if it is
charged. Therefore you must switch on the lab power supply long
enough before you switch on the AutoBox.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
233
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Data Sheets ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
DS830 Data Sheet
The following table shows the technical characteristics of the DS830
Multilink Panel.
Parameter
Specification
Enclosure
Aluminium box (not waterproof)
Connectable boxes
Up to 4 (DS830-4), 8 (DS830-8) or 16 (DS830-16)
expansion boxes and/or MicroAutoBoxes
Supported link interfaces
DS813, DS814, DS815, DS817, MicroAutoBox
Physical connection
In any combination:
• Crossed-over patch cable: twisted pair (CAT5 STP)
• Fiber-optic cable: multimode (50/125 µm)
Cable length per connection
•
•
Protocol
High-speed serial link (proprietary)
Max. transfer rate
100 MBit/s 1)
Status LEDs
Various LEDs displaying the current status of each
connection and the power supply
Power supply
•
•
Power consumption
Max. 10 m (crossed-over patch cable)
Max. 100 m (fiber-optic cable)
+6 V … +58 V DC
Overvoltage protection and protection against
reverse polarity (± 80 V)
DS830-4
16 W
DS830-8
24 W
DS830-16
40 W
Physical size
(length x depth x height)
DS830-4
201.6 x 56.0 x 108.6 mm ( 7.9 x 2.2 x 4.3 in.)
DS830-8
288.0 x 56.0 x 108.6 mm (11.3 x 2.2 x 4.3 in.)
DS830-16
460.8 x 56.0 x 108.6 mm (18.1 x 2.2 x 4.3 in.)
Approx. weight
DS830-4
0.75 kg (1.65 lb.)
DS830-8
1.10 kg (2.43 lb.)
DS830-16
1.70 kg (3.75 lb.)
Ambient temperature
•
•
0 … 50 ºC (32 … 122 ºF)
Active cooling (fan)
1) The transfer rate describes the capabilities of the hardware components and circuits of dSPACE products. Depending on the
software complexity the attainable overall performance can deviate significantly from the hardware specification.
234
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Troubleshooting
If any problem related to the installation and configuration of your
system occurs, refer to the following information:
■ DS1103 Board on page 237
■ Problems with Multiple Plug & Play Boards on page 238
■ Host PC (Bus Connection) on page 240
■ Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection) on page 241
■ Expansion Box (Bus Connection) on page 245
■ Problems Related to the Firmware on page 248
■ Problems with AutoBoot Option on page 248
T
If this information does not help you solve the problem, you should
check the support section of our Web site
http://www.dspace.de/goto?support. This might help you solve the
problem on your own. The support’s FAQ section especially might be
of help.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
235
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
If you cannot solve the problem, contact dSPACE Support via
dSPACE Support Wizard. It is available:
■ On your dSPACE CD at \Diag\Tools\dSPACESupportWizard.exe
■ Via Start – Programs – dSPACE Tools (after installation of the
dSPACE software)
■ At http://www.dspace.de/goto?supportwizard
You can always find the latest version of dSPACE Support Wizard
here.
236
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Troubleshooting
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
DS1103 Board
Perform the following checks if the DS1103 does not operate
correctly:
➤ Check whether host PC and expansion box operate correctly.
➤ Check the I/O base address of the DS1103. An address conflict
does not necessarily result in the host PC or expansion box not
booting anymore.
➤ Use ControlDesk’s Platform Manager to check the board properties
(see How to Run ControlDesk on page 102).
The DS1103 page in ControlDesk’s Controller Board Properties
dialog displays the current temperature of the real-time processor.
The processor is automatically put into the non-operating mode if
the CPU temperature exceeds 80 °C. The CPU can be restarted
with ControlDesk if the temperature is fallen below 75 °C (there is
a hysteresis of 5 °C).
➤ Check the status of the red LEDs on the board. For details, see
Status LEDs of the DS1103 on page 192.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
237
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Problems with Multiple Plug & Play
Boards
Working with more than one dSPACE board in plug & play
configuration presents us with two problems. The first is that the
logical name of a board as assigned by the software must be
associated with a physical board. The second is that under certain
conditions, assignment of the names to the boards may change
unexpectedly. It is vital to detect this situation, because otherwise an
application to be loaded to a certain board might be loaded to another
board of the same type by mistake.
For example, assume you have one board connected to the engine
ECU and another connected to the ESP system of a vehicle. In order to
avoid severe damage to the car, you must avoid loading the program
intended for the ECU-related board to the ESP-related board, and vice
versa.
Affected boards
The problem described always applies to DS1104 boards (and
MicroAutoBox via DS815 or DS817) because plug & play mode
cannot be disabled.
It also applies to DS1103 and DS1005 boards if they are configured to
plug & play mode. For these boards, plug & play mode can be used
only if they are installed in a PC directly. This might be the case with an
industrial PC with many ISA slots and a built-in PC.
The problem can be avoided for DS1103 and DS1005 boards installed
in a PC simply by disabling the plug & play mode. This means,
however, that you must set up a configuration free of I/O address
conflicts by setting the I/O address switches of the boards manually.
For details, see Changing Default I/O Base Addresses on page 36.
Plug & play boards
The problem never applies to DS1103, DS1005 and DS1006 boards
in an expansion box
installed in a dSPACE expansion box independently of the type of
interface used to connect the box to the PC, because when they are
installed in expansion boxes, the plug & play mode must be disabled.
238
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Troubleshooting
Handling plug & play
ControlDesk’s Platform Manager handles the boards by detecting their
boards in ControlDesk
type (DS1005, DS1103, DS1104, MicroAutoBox via DS815 or DS817)
and their actual I/O address. For plug & play boards, the actual I/O
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
address is dynamically assigned by the PC BIOS or the plug & play
components of the operating system. If you add hardware
components to your host PC or remove them from it, or enable or
disable motherboard components, the PC's BIOS and/or the operating
system's plug & play components assign new resources such as I/O
addresses to all plug & play components, including dSPACE boards in
plug & play mode.
This may result in different I/O addresses being assigned to the same
board without even touching any of the dSPACE boards! This situation
cannot be automatically corrected by the Platform Manager. It does,
however, detect a change in the configuration, that is a change in the
names assigned to the boards and the particular board. Detection is
based on the board serial numbers.
The Platform Manager detects such a change if at least one board was
allocated a different name by the device driver. The affected board is
removed from the dSPACE configuration and cannot be accessed by
the Platform Manager to avoid confusion when loading applications
and to prevent damage to external devices connected to the board.
The Platform Manager displays an error message and requires the user
to reregister all the hardware before all boards can be used again.
To restore a consistent dSPACE board configuration
1
From ControlDesk’s menu bar, choose Platform – Initialization –
Clear System.
Boards setup in plug & play mode are then reregistered
automatically.
2
In the Platform Navigator, double-click the corresponding board
icon to open the Platform Properties dialog.
3
Compare the serial number of each dSPACE board (label on each
board’s bracket) with the one shown in the board’s property page
of the Platform Manager to make sure that your applications are
still loaded to the correct dSPACE boards.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
239
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
The following table displays the affected dSPACE boards and the
property pages showing the boards’ serial numbers:
dSPACE Board
Property Page
DS1005
DS1005 Properties page
DS1103
DS1103 Properties page
DS1104
Board Properties page
DS1401
(MicroAutoBox)
DS1401 Properties page
For details, see Platform Properties in the ControlDesk Reference.
N
■ After using the Clear System command, you must reregister all
installed dSPACE boards that do not support plug & play or where
plug & play mode is disabled by means of the address switches.
■ It is your responsibility to check and ensure that all applications are
still loaded to the correct board. Since this is not under complete
control of the dSPACE software it might even be necessary to
change external connections to the boards! In a subsequent
release of the Platform Manager it will be possible to assign board
names to the particular boards as needed.
Host PC (Bus Connection)
If the host PC does not operate correctly after installation of the
DS1103, check the insertion and the I/O base address setting of the
board. Maybe other boards are using the same I/O addresses.
240
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Troubleshooting
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Expansion Box (Ethernet Connection)
The following errors may occur when you work with an expansion box
connected to your host PC via Ethernet.
In addition, problems to the following topics may occur:
■ TCP/IP Protocol on page 243
■ Peer-To-Peer Connection on page 244
■ Integration of an Expansion Box in a Network on page 244
Error
Expansion box does not boot
The expansion box contains a slot CPU with a 5x86-133 CPU and a
built-in 10baseT (Twisted Pair, 10 MHz) network adapter as well as a
VGA graphics adapter. A Flash Disk on the slot CPU stores all the
necessary software for the network connection on the client side.
If you cannot establish a connection to the expansion box anymore,
then the BIOS setup might be missing and the expansion box will not
boot.
To restore the missing BIOS setup of the slot CPU
1
Connect a keyboard to the Slot CPU using the supplied keyboard
adapter cable. Connect a VGA monitor to the slot CPU.
2
Switch on the expansion box, and enter the setup screen.
3
Select Standard CMOS Setup, and set the BIOS default values.
4
From the drop-down list Halt on:, choose On no errors.
5
Select BIOS Features Setup, and set the Boot Sequence to "A/C."
The other values can be used without any changes.
6
After you have completed the BIOS setup, save the information,
and exit the setup.
7
During restart of the slot CPU, watch the power-on self test
messages and the messages displayed by the network drivers
during loading. The last message indicates that the client software
has started. The system is ready for use again.
8
Turn off the expansion box, and disconnect the VGA monitor and
the keyboard.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
241
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Error
IP Address lost
During start-up the expansion box beeps several times. The last beep
sequence indicates whether the default IP address (192.100.100.98)
stored in the Flash Disk is active (three short beeps) or if the IP address
has been changed by the user (one long beep).
The host and the expansion box cannot be connected via Ethernet if
the IP address of the expansion box is unknown.
➤ To find out the client’s IP address, connect a VGA monitor to the
slot CPU. The IP address is displayed during power-up. Use this
address to connect to the expansion box again.
Error
Wrong IP address
The IP addresses of expansion box and network, or expansion box and
host PC (for peer-to-peer connection) must adhere to the following
rules:
■ The network part of the IP address must be identical on both
systems. Only the workstation part may differ. For details, refer to a
definition of IP address classes.
■ The IP address of each node must be unique within the network.
■ The IP address must not be one of the reserved loopback addresses
127.0.0.0 and 127.0.0.1. Additional restrictions may apply.
Error
Wrong subnet mask
The expansion box does not support subnetting. The subnet mask is
always adjusted automatically according to the selected IP address
class when changing the IP address using the setip utility. Zero subnet
bits are set.
Error
Wrong cable
The supplied crossed-over patch cable can only be used for a
peer-to-peer connection via Ethernet. It cannot be used to connect the
expansion box to an existing network.
➤ Use a normal (non crossed-over) cable to integrate the expansion
box into an existing network.
242
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Troubleshooting
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
TCP/IP Protocol
When you check the installation of the TCP/IP protocol with the ping
command, the following error messages may occur:
Error message
Bad command or file name
The TCP/IP protocol has not been installed properly.
➤ Install the TCP/IP protocol again.
Error message
The name specified is not recognized as an internal or
external command, operable program or batch file
The TCP/IP protocol has not been installed properly.
➤ Install the TCP/IP protocol again.
Error message
Unable to contact IP driver, error code x
The TCP/IP protocol has not been installed properly.
➤ Install the TCP/IP protocol again.
Error message
Pinging 127.0.0.1 with x bytes of data:
Request timed out
The TCP/IP protocol has not been configured properly.
➤ Check the configuration of the TCP/IP protocol. If you are
uncertain, ask your system administrator.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
243
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Peer-To-Peer Connection
You may encounter some problems when you set up a peer-to-peer
connection between your host PC and an expansion box.
Error message
Pinging 192.100.100.98 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out
➤ Check whether the network adapter of the host PC has been
installed and configured correctly.
➤ Make sure that the correct crossed-over patch cable is connected.
A standard patch cable cannot be used for this type of connection.
➤ Check whether the expansion box is switched on.
➤ Check whether the expansion box is configured to a wrong
IP address: see IP Address lost on page 242.
➤ Check the IP address of the host PC. It should be set to
192.100.100.1. If a different IP address is used, the host might not
be able to connect to the client.
Integration of an Expansion Box in a Network
You may encounter some problems when you integrate an expansion
box in a network.
➤ Check whether the network adapter of the host PC has been
installed and configured correctly.
➤ Check whether the correct standard patch cable is connected and
the expansion box is switched on.
➤ Check whether the expansion box is configured to a wrong
IP address: see IP Address lost on page 242.
➤ Check whether the previous TCP/IP configuration of the host PC
was restored properly.
244
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Troubleshooting
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Expansion Box (Bus Connection)
You should follow these guidelines when connecting the host PC to an
expansion box via a bus interface:
■ When switching on the system, the expansion box should usually
be switched on first, followed by the PC.
■ Do not switch off the expansion box while the PC is still running.
This might lead to unpredictable errors.
■ If you already installed other PC cards, problems may occur when
you install the DS815 under Windows NT. For details, see Using the
DS815 with Other PC Cards Under Windows NT on page 246.
■ If you use the DS815 together with third-party socket services,
problems may occur when you install the DS815. In this case, use
the software of the third-party socket service to reconfigure the
resource settings of the DS815.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
245
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Using the DS815 with Other PC Cards Under
Windows NT
You can use the DS815 together with other PC cards. However,
resource conflicts might occur.
➤ If you do not want to work with the other PC cards any longer,
remove them.
or
➤ Reconfigure the resource settings of the other PC cards.
or
➤ Reconfigure the resource settings of the DS815 using the DS815
Configuration Utility. See below for details.
DS815 Configuration Utility
The DS815 Configuration Utility ds815cfg.exe allows you to
reconfigure the resource settings of the DS815.
To reconfigure the resource settings of the DS815
1
In Windows Explorer, double-click the ds815cfg.exe file, which
can be found in %DSPACE_ROOT%\Exe
The DS815 Configuration Utility dialog opens.
2
In the DS815 Configuration Utility dialog, select the Change
settings option.
246
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
3
Troubleshooting
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
In the DS815 Configuration Utility dialog, specify the IRQ value
and I/O Port value for the DS815.
N
Make sure that these resources are not used by other PC cards or
PC components.
4
Click OK.
5
Reboot the PC to apply the new settings.
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
247
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
Problems Related to the Firmware
If you are prompted to update your firmware when downloading an
application to your real-time processor(s), see Updating the Firmware
on page 109 for further information.
Problems with AutoBoot Option
If a problem related to Autoboot Option arises, this section shows you
how to resolve it.
N
For information on the necessary steps for migration from the
Autoboot environment of former dSPACE Releases (up to dSPACE
Release 3.4) to the new Autoboot environment shipped since dSPACE
Release 3.5, refer to:
%DSPACE_ROOT%\AbxBoot\Migration\MIGRATION.TXT
Error
The application does not boot.
➤ If the expansion box does not boot properly, connect a VGA
monitor to the slot CPU. This allows you to observe error messages
displayed by the slot CPU during power-up.
Error
The application does not boot. The error message "bad
command or file name" is displayed.
➤ Check the autoboot.bat file if you have misspelled a command.
Error
The application does not boot properly. The program loader
claims that the object file of the application cannot be found.
The program loader assumes the default file name extension of the
object file: that is, the extension PPC for the DS1103.
➤ Do not specify the file name extension when you invoke the
program loader on the command line.
Error
The file name of the application is longer than eight letters.
File names that are longer than eight letters are not supported by the
slot CPU since DOS cannot handle long file names properly.
248
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Troubleshooting
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
For instructions, see How to Handle AutoBoot Applications with Long
File Names on page 154.
N
Do not rename any files on the host PC.
Error
The program loader generates an error because it cannot find
the dSPACE board.
➤ The program loader assumes the default setting of the board’s
I/O base address, that is, 300H for the DS1103.
To specify another I/O base address, you have to add a parameter
to the existing command line in the autoboot.bat of the
CompactFlash card, for example:
ld1103ab smd1103a /b ds1103 /p 0x320
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
249
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Troubleshooting ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
250
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
Index
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
Index
Numerics
bus interface
limitations 54
19 inch rack (PX20) 50
C
A
adapter cable
DS815-RJ45 60
analog connector (P1) 164
AutoBoot option
autobooting an application 150
CompactFlash card 149
components 145
demo application 150
formatting the CompactFlash card 149
hardware 145
hardware requirements 146
installation prerequisites 146
long file names 154
PC card reader installation 147
slave application 153
software 145
software requirements 146
troubleshooting 248
autobooting
an application 150
AutoBox 47
data sheet 224
DC-DC converter 47
dimension drawing 227
important notes 23
laboratory power supply 233
power input connector 49, 232
remote voltage 48
safety precautions 23
wiring scheme 48
AutoBox, Tandem-AutoBox
power input connector 49
B
BIOS setup of the slot CPU 241
BNC connectors (CP1...CP28) 180
boards
connecting external devices 138
boot firmware 109
bracket LEDs on bus interface 61
bus connection 53
bus interface 53
available combinations 54
bracket LEDs 61
DS813 54
DS814 54
DS815 54
DS817 55
CAN connector (CP39) 186
C-coded models 121
changing the I/O base address 38
CLP1103
data sheet 220
CompactFlash card
AutoBoot option 145
CompactFlash card for AutoBoot
option 149
conflicting I/O features 206
connecting
expansion box 51
external devices 137
connection
DS813/DS814 interface 56
DS815/DS814 interface 57
DS817/DS814 interface 56
DS830 MultiLink Panel 64
connection mode 105
connector panels
BNC connectors (CP1 ... CP28) 180
CAN connector (CP38) 186
connecting external devices 140
connecting to the board 45
digital I/O connector (CP30) 182
incremental encoder interface
connectors (CP32 ... CP37, CP39) 185
mounting in a 19 inch rack 46
slave ADC connector (CP29) 181
slave I/O connector (CP31) 183
slave RS232 connector (CP41) 188
Slave RS422 connector (CP43) 190
UART RS232 connector (CP40) 187
UART RS422 (CP42) 189
connector pinouts
CP1103/CLP1103 178
DS1103 163
ControlDesk
demo experiment 133
instrument panel 130
layout 130
plug & play 239
CP1103
data sheet 219
D
data sheet 215
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox 224
CLP1103 220
CP1103 219
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
data sheet
DS1103 216
DS830 234
PX10 expansion box 222
PX20 expansion box 223
PX4 expansion box 221
de-installation 155
demo experiment for ControlDesk 133
demo model 126
development steps 113
digital connector (P2) DS1103 168
digital I/O connector (CP30) 182
dimension drawing
AutoBox 227
Tandem-AutoBox 229
down1103 command 121
download a real-time application 123
DS1103
analog connector (P1) 164
connector pinouts 163
data sheet 216
digital connector (P2) 168
I/O base address 36
incremental encoder/digital connector
(P3) 172
registering 106
slave-DSP debug connector (P6) 176
slave-DSP flash jumper (J1) 177
troubleshooting 237
DS813 Link Board
bracket LEDs 61
connection 56
limitations 55
DS814 Link Board
bracket LEDs 61
limitations 55
DS815 Link Board
connection 57
limitations 55
DS815-RJ45
adapter cable 60
DS817 Link Board
bracket LEDs 61
connection 56
limitations 55
DS830 MultiLink Panel 62
connection 64
data sheet 234
installation 64
limitations 63
to supply power 65
dSPACE board configuration
restore 239
dSPACE board library 118
dSPACE HelpDesk 10
March 2004
251
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Index ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
dSPACE Prototyper for RCP 16
E
editing the host table
Windows 2000/Windows XP 92
Windows NT 4.0 77
Ethernet connection 67
desktop PC
Windows 2000/Windows XP 85
Windows NT 4.0 71
network adapter
Windows 2000/Windows XP 85
Windows NT 4.0 71
notebook PC
Windows 2000/Windows XP 85
Windows NT 4.0 71
peer-to-peer
Windows 2000/Windows XP 83
Windows NT 4.0 69
setting up procedure
Windows 2000/Windows XP 83
Windows NT 4.0 69
slot CPU 52
under Windows 2000 83
under Windows NT 4.0 69
under Windows XP 83
expanding the system 40
expansion box 31
19’’ rack (PX20) 50
AutoBox 47
AutoBox, data sheet 224
connecting 51
connection via bus interface 53
connection via Ethernet 52
Ethernet connection 67
important notes 22
installing boards 40
integration in existing network
Windows 2000/Windows XP 83
Windows NT 4.0 69
peer-to-peer connection
Windows 2000/Windows XP 83
Windows NT 4.0 69
PX10, data sheet 222
PX20, data sheet 223
PX4, data sheet 221
requirements 28
safety precautions 22
Tandem-AutoBox, data sheet 224
turning the box on/off 22
expansion box (bus connection)
troubleshooting 245
expansion box (Ethernet connection)
troubleshooting 241
experimenting with ControlDesk 126
252
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
external devices
connecting to the dSPACE system 137
F
firmware
automatic update 110
available firmware version 109
boot firmware 109
current firmware version 109
manual update 110
required firmware version 109
troubleshooting 248
updating 109
user firmware 109
formatting CompactFlash card 149
G
getting started 113
GND pins 204
H
hardware
installation 31
uninstallation 156
HelpDesk 10
host PC
installing boards 40
requirements 28
host PC (bus connection)
troubleshooting 240
host table
editing
Windows 2000/Windows XP 92
Windows NT 4.0 77
I
I/O base address
DS1103 36
implementing C models 121
incremental encoder/digital connector (P3)
DS1103 172
incremental sensor connectors (CP32 ...
CP37, CP39) 185
installation
AutoBoot option 146
connector panels 45
DS1103 40
DS830 MultiLink Panel 64
dSPACE boards 40
hardware 31
IP Address Lost 242
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
L
laboratory power supply
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox 233
LED assignment CLP1103 191
link boards
available combinations 54
expansion box 54
host PC 54
M
make_rti command 120
MAP file 127
N
network adapter for Ethernet connection
Windows 2000/Windows XP 85
Windows NT 4.0 71
P
PC card
adapter 145
link cables 58
PC card reader
AutoBoot option 147
PCMCIA-adapter 145
PDF files 11
plug & play
board configuration 239
ControlDesk 239
DS1103 37
multiple plug & play boards 238
power input connector
AutoBox, Tandem-AutoBox 49
AutoBox/Tandem-AutoBox 232
printed documents 11
PX10 31
PX20 31
PX4 31
R
real-time application
creation via hand-coding 115
creation via RTI 115
downloading 123
reload 124
scoutcmd 125
starting 123
stop 124
registering
DS1103 106
reload a real-time application 124
March 2004
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
requirements
expansion box 28
host PC 28
rti1103 command 118
running ControlDesk 102
Index
I
▲
■■■■■■■■■■
user firmware 109
using ControlDesk 128
V
VCC pins 205
verifying the configuration 108
viewing the board properties 107
S
scoutcmd 125
load application to global memory 125
SDF file 127
setting the connection mode 105
setting up the DS1103 36
simulation parameters 119
Simulink model
handling 119
slave ADC connector (CP29) 181
slave I/O connector 183
slave RS232 connector (CP41) 188
slave RS422 connector (CP43) 190
Slave-DSP debug connector (P6)
DS1103 176
Slave-DSP flash jumper (J1) DS1103 177
start a real-time application 123
starting ControlDesk 102
starting RTI 116
status LEDs
DS1103 192
DS830 66
stop a real-time application 124
switching the board library 118
system requirements 28
W
wrong cable 242
wrong subnet mask 242
T
Tandem-AutoBox
data sheet 224
dimension drawing 229
laboratory power supply 233
power input connector 49, 232
TCP/IP protocol
changing
Windows 2000/Windows XP 86
installing
Windows NT 4.0 72
setting up
Windows 2000/Windows XP 88
Windows NT 4.0 74
TLC file 120
TRC file 127
troubleshooting 235
U
UART RS232 connector (CP40) 187
UART RS422 connector (CP422) 189
updating the firmware 109
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004
253
▲
■
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
I■■■■■■■■■■■■■▼ Index ▲■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
254
■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■
▼
DS1103 Hardware Installation and Configuration
March 2004